JP2008188298A - Slot machine - Google Patents

Abstract

<P>PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a slot machine capable of partitioning a game without troubling a player, surely managing the game conditions or the like of the slot machine on a game hall side, and canceling the set number of bets once. <P>SOLUTION: Shifting to a big (1) in which the number of tokens putout in big ending conditions is a first stipulated value and a big (2) in which it is a second stipulated value larger than the first stipulated value is made possible. In a game for which the big (2) is ended, number-of-bets setting inhibition is canceled when ending performance standby time elapses from determination of game end. In a game for which the big (1) is ended, after the ending performance standby time elapses from the determination of game end and credits are adjusted, control to a closing state of canceling the number-of-bets setting inhibition by a canceling operation is performed. The setting of the number of bets is canceled in response to the operation of an adjustment switch and tokens are discharged. <P>COPYRIGHT: (C)2008,JPO&INPIT

Description

  The present invention relates to a slot machine capable of generating a predetermined winning according to a display result of a variable display device capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols each identifiable.

  The conventional slot machine is advantageous for a player such as a big bonus when a combination of symbols corresponding to a special prize (for example, a combination of “7-7-7”) is prepared on a variable display device composed of a plurality of reels, for example. It is common to have a transition role that shifts to a special game state.

In addition, in this type of slot machine, a specific player monopolizes the slot machine to prevent unfairness with other players or to prevent fraud. For the purpose of managing the gaming situation of the slot machine at the gaming store side, such as the gaming store side grasping the payout status of medals reliably, for example, a predetermined bonus such as the end of a big bonus, etc. When the conditions are met, a stop function that makes it possible to stop the game unless a game store clerk performs a predetermined release operation, and an automatic checkout function that automatically pays out game media such as credited medals (For example, refer to Patent Documents 1 and 2).
JP-A-7-204316 JP 2003-79812 A

  However, in particular, in the slot machines as described in Patent Documents 1 and 2, for example, when the number of medals acquired by the player during the big bonus has reached a predetermined value, In the case where a plurality of types of big bonuses having different values are installed, and if the setting is made so that stoppage or automatic settlement is performed on condition that the big bonus has ended, the big bonus in which a small value is set as the predetermined value In other words, even when the big bonus with a small number of medals that can be acquired during the big bonus is terminated, the game in the slot machine is divided by stopping or automatic settlement, so that the player feels troublesome.

  Also, in this type of conventional slot machine, when the player wants to cancel the bet number setting, there is no means for canceling the set bet number, and the player's mind changes midway. Even in such a case, once the number of bets is set, there is a problem that a game must be performed.

  The present invention has been made paying attention to such problems, and it is possible to reliably manage the gaming situation and the like of the slot machine at the game store side by giving the game a break without bothering the player. An object of the present invention is to provide a slot machine that can cancel the set bet amount.

Specific examples of means for solving the problems and their effects

(1) A variable display device (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) that can start a game by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game and can variably display a plurality of types of symbols that can be individually identified. ) Is a slot machine (slot machine 1) in which one game is completed by the derivation and display of the display result, and a winning can be generated according to the display result of the variable display device,
A game value storage means (credit counter) for storing the amount of game value that can be used to set the bet number;
Bet number storage means (BET counter) for storing bet numbers;
Bet number setting means (Se4, Se14, Se26, Se31) for setting a bet number in the bet number storage means in response to a betting operation using a game value stored in the game value storage means or insertion of a game medium; ,
Settlement operating means (checkout switch 10) for instructing the discharge of the number of game media corresponding to the magnitude of the game value stored in the game value storage means in response to the player's operation;
When an operation of the settlement operation unit is detected in a state where the bet number is set in the bet number storage unit, the number of games corresponding to the game value corresponding to the bet number set in the bet number storage unit The medium is discharged and the betting number storage means is controlled to be in a storage state in which the betting number is not set, and the operation of the settlement operation means is detected again before the betting number is set again in the betting number storage means. Sometimes, the settlement control means (Se34 to Se36) controls to discharge the number of game media corresponding to the game value stored in the game value storage means and to set the game value storage means to the non-game value storage state. , Sf1 to Sf12, FIG. 21 (a)),
When a first special prize (big bonus (2) prize) or a second special prize (big bonus (1) prize) different from the first special prize occurs, it is more for the player than the normal gaming state. Special gaming state control means (control for transition to bonus by the CPU 41a) for shifting the gaming state to an advantageous special gaming state (big bonus);
Special gaming state value counting means (counting the number of medals by a big bonus payout number counter) for counting the magnitude of the gaming value given by the occurrence of the giving prize accompanying the giving of the gaming value in the special gaming state;
In the special gaming state (big bonus (2)) shifted with the occurrence of the first special prize, the magnitude of the gaming value counted by the special gaming state value counting means is a first specified value (301). First special game state ending means for ending the special game state on the condition that it has reached (CPU 41a clears the big bonus (2) flag and turns off the signal in BB (2)),
In the special gaming state (big bonus (1)) shifted with the occurrence of the second special prize, the value of the gaming value counted by the special gaming state value counting means is larger than the first specified value. On the condition that the second specified value (466 cards) has been reached, second special game state ending means for ending the special game state (the CPU 41a clears the big bonus (1) flag, and BB (1) Medium signal is OFF),
A bet number setting prohibiting unit (the CPU 41a sets prohibition of inserting medals by setting at the start of the game and prohibits setting of a bet number by the bet number setting unit when the game starts. , Disable detection of the MAXBET switch 6),
When a display result other than the display result corresponding to the winning prize is derived to the variable display device, the end of the game is determined when the display result is derived to the variable display device, and the grant is given to the variable display device. When the display result corresponding to the winning is derived, the game end determining means for determining the end of the game when the awarding of the game value accompanying the award winning is completed (with the game end determination by the CPU 41a and the medal payout) In a game in which no winning has occurred, the end of the game is determined when all reels stop. In a game in which a winning with a medal payout has occurred, the game is completed when the medal payout (addition of credits) has ended. To determine the end of
On the condition that the game end determination means determines the end of the game, the bet number setting prohibition release means (the CPU 41a is the first of the BET process of the next game) that cancels the prohibition of the bet number setting by the bet number setting prohibition means. To cancel the inability to insert medals and enable detection of the single BET switch 5 and the MAX BET switch 6).
The bet number setting prohibition canceling means includes:
In the game in which the special gaming state is ended by the first special gaming state ending unit, the betting number setting prohibiting unit prohibits the setting of the betting number when the game end determining unit determines the end of the game. First bet number setting prohibition canceling means for canceling (the CPU 41a cancels the insertion of medals at the beginning of the BET process of the next game after the end of the big bonus (2), and detects the single BET switch 5 and the MAXBET switch 6 Enable)
In the game in which the special game state is ended by the second special game state ending unit, the betting is performed when a predetermined release operation (reset operation) is performed after the game end determination unit determines the end of the game. The second betting number setting prohibition canceling means for canceling the prohibition of setting of the betting number by the number setting prohibiting means (the CPU 41a controls to the stop state after the big bonus (1) is finished, and the reset operation is detected in the stop state. And the transition to the next game is made, and at the beginning of the BET process of the next game, the inability to insert medals is canceled and the detection of the one-sheet BET switch 5 and the MAXBET switch 6 is validated).

  According to such a configuration, only when the special gaming state that ends when the value of the gaming value acquired in the special gaming state reaches the second specified value that is larger than the first specified value ends. The betting number setting prohibiting means by the betting number setting prohibiting means when the predetermined releasing operation is performed can be controlled in a so-called stop state, so that the slot machine can be performed without bothering the player. In this way, the game situation of the slot machine can be reliably managed at the game store side.

  Note that the predetermined number of bets is at least one bet number, and a game can be started by setting a bet number of two or more or setting a maximum bet number. Good. Further, the game may be started by setting a bet number determined according to a plurality of gaming states.

  Further, the special gaming state value counting means for counting the magnitude of the gaming value given in the special gaming state may count the number of medals paid out to the player in the special gaming state, The number of medals obtained by subtracting the number of medals used by the player in setting the number of bets in the special gaming state from the number of medals paid out to the player in the special gaming state may be counted.

  The special gaming state that is shifted when the first special winning or the second special winning is generated is controlled to a special game in which the awarded winning is generated with a higher probability than the normal gaming state for a predetermined period. The drawing range of the symbols is smaller than in the gaming state and the normal gaming state, but even if the occurrence of a specific prize winning is not permitted, it is allowed to draw in and stop the symbol corresponding to the specific prize winning Therefore, it may be a gaming state that can be won with a higher probability than the normal gaming state.

  (2) A number of game media corresponding to the game value stored in the game value storage means when an operation of the settlement operation means is detected in a state where the bet number is set in the bet number storage means And the game value storage means is controlled to be in a non-game value storage state, and the operation of the settlement operation means is detected again before the game value is stored again in the game value storage means. A checkout control means for discharging the number of game media corresponding to the game value corresponding to the bet number set in the bet number storage means and controlling the bet number storage means to a storage state in which the bet number is not set ( FIG. 21 (b)) is provided.

  According to such a configuration, the set bet number can be canceled once by the operation of the settlement operation means. In particular, the game value stored in the slot machine can be returned as a game medium in the first operation, and the bet number setting can be canceled and returned as a game medium in the second operation. Is improved.

  (3) When an operation of the settlement operation means is detected in a state where the bet number is set in the bet number storage means, the game value corresponding to the bet number set in the bet number storage means is Control is made to add to the stored value of the value storage means and to set the betting number storage means to a storage state in which the betting number is not set, and the operation of the settlement operation means before the betting number is set again in the betting number storage means When the game value is detected again, the checkout control is performed to control the number of game media corresponding to the game value stored in the game value storage means to be discharged and the game value storage means to be stored in a state in which no game value is stored. Means (FIG. 21C).

  According to such a configuration, the set bet number can be canceled once by the operation of the settlement operation means. In particular, the bet number setting can be canceled by the first operation, and the canceled amount can be stored as a game value in the slot machine, and the game value stored in the slot machine can be returned as a game medium by the second operation. Therefore, convenience for the player is improved.

  (4) When an operation of the settlement operation unit is detected in a state where the bet number is set in the bet number storage unit, it corresponds to a game value corresponding to the bet number set in the bet number storage unit. After controlling the number of game media to be discharged and setting the bet number storage means to the storage state in which the bet number is not set, the number of game media corresponding to the game value stored in the game value storage means is discharged. In addition, there is a payment control means (FIG. 22 (d)) for controlling the gaming value storage means to be in a storage state having no gaming value.

  According to such a configuration, the set bet number can be canceled once by the operation of the settlement operation means. In particular, since it is possible to cancel the setting of the bet number and return it as a game medium by only one operation of the settlement operation means, and subsequently return the game value stored in the slot machine as a game medium, it is convenient for the player. Is improved.

  (5) When an operation of the settlement operation means is detected in a state where the bet number is set in the bet number storage means, the number of game media corresponding to the game value stored in the game value storage means And controlling the game value storage means to be in a state of no game value, and then discharging a number of game media corresponding to the game value corresponding to the bet number set in the bet number storage means In addition, there is a settlement control means (FIG. 22 (e)) for controlling the betting number storage means to a storage state in which the betting number is not set.

  According to such a configuration, the set bet number can be canceled once by the operation of the settlement operation means. In particular, the game value stored in the slot machine can be returned as a game medium by only one operation of the settlement operation means, and then the bet number setting can be canceled and returned as a game medium. Is improved.

  (6) When an operation of the settlement operation means is detected in a state where a bet number is set in the bet number storage means, the game value corresponding to the bet number set in the bet number storage means is The number of game media corresponding to the game value stored in the game value storage means is added to the stored value of the value storage means and control is performed to set the bet number storage means to a storage state in which the bet number is not set. And a settlement control means (FIG. 22 (f)) for controlling the game value storage means to be in a storage state having no game value.

  According to such a configuration, the set bet number can be canceled once by the operation of the settlement operation means. In particular, it is possible to cancel the setting of the bet number by only one operation of the settlement operation means, store the canceled amount as a gaming value in the slot machine, and subsequently return the gaming value stored in the slot machine as a gaming medium. Convenience for the player is improved.

(7) When the game is started, an operation-time control prohibiting means for prohibiting the control of the payment control means according to the operation of the payment operating means (the CPU 41a detects the payment switch 10 by setting at the start of the game). Disable)
On the condition that the game end determination means has determined the end of the game, the operation-time control prohibition release means (the detection of the checkout switch 10 by the CPU 41a) that cancels the prohibition of the control of the payment control means by the operation-time control prohibition means. Activation)
The operation-time control prohibition canceling means prohibits control of the settlement control means by the operation-time control prohibiting means when the game end determination means determines the end of the game in the game in which the special gaming state has ended. An end-time control prohibition release means for releasing (in the end game of the big bonus, the CPU 41a enables detection of the settlement switch 10 when it is determined that the game has ended).

  According to such a configuration, even if the game is terminated in the game in which the special game state has ended, the game value owned by the player stored in the game value storage means can be returned. It is possible to receive the return of the game value reflecting the will of the player who wants to end the game immediately after the end of the state.

(8) In a game in which the special gaming state is ended by the second special gaming state ending unit (an end game of the big bonus (1)), the game end determining unit determines in advance that the game has ended. End effect execution means for executing an end effect (ending effect) indicating that the special gaming state has ended during the period until the given time (effect waiting time) elapses (the CPU 91a executes the ending effect at the end of the big bonus) )
The second betting number setting prohibition release means is at least in advance from the game end determination means determining the end of the game in the game in which the special game state is ended by the second special game state end means. On the condition that a predetermined time has elapsed and the predetermined release operation (reset operation) has been performed after the predetermined time has elapsed, the betting number setting prohibiting means prohibits setting of the betting number. (The CPU 41a controls to the stop state after the production waiting time has elapsed since the end of the big bonus (1) and shifts to the next game by detecting the reset operation in the stop state. At the beginning of the BET process of the next game, the inability to insert medals is canceled, and the detection of the single BET switch 5 and the MAX BET switch 6 is enabled).

  According to such a configuration, even if a predetermined release operation is performed before a predetermined time elapses after the end game in the special gaming state ends, that is, before the end effect ends, the number of bets Since the game cannot be set, the interest of the game is not impaired.

Further, when the game is started, an operation-time control prohibiting means (the CPU 41a detects the checkout switch 10 with the setting at the start of the game) that prohibits the control of the payment control means according to the operation of the payment operation means. Disable)
When the game end determination means determines the end of the game, the operation-time control prohibition canceling means (validation of the detection of the checkout switch 10 by the CPU 41a) cancels the prohibition of the control of the payment control means by the operation-time control prohibiting means. ), The game value owned by the player stored in the game value storage means can be returned even if the game is stopped in the game in which the special game state has ended. It is possible to receive the return of the game value reflecting the will of the player who wants to end the game immediately after the end of the game.

(9) When the game is started, an operation time control prohibiting means for prohibiting the control of the payment control means according to the operation of the payment operation means (the CPU 41a detects the checkout switch 10 by setting at the start of the game). Disable)
On the condition that the game end determination means has determined the end of the game, the operation-time control prohibition release means (the detection of the checkout switch 10 by the CPU 41a) that cancels the prohibition of the control of the payment control means by the operation-time control prohibition means. Activation),
In a game in which the second special prize has occurred (a big bonus (1) prize game), a period from when the game end determination means determines the end of the game until a predetermined time (effect waiting time) elapses. Special winning effect execution means for executing a special winning effect (winning effect) indicating that the second special winning has occurred (the CPU 91a executes the BB winning effect at the end of the game with the big bonus). Prepared,
The betting number setting prohibition canceling means is the betting number setting prohibiting means when the predetermined time has elapsed after the game end determining means determines the end of the game in the game in which the second special winning has occurred. The betting number setting prohibition canceling means for canceling the setting of the betting number by the winning effect (the CPU 41a waits for the rendering waiting time after the rendering waiting time has elapsed after the game in which the big bonus (1) winning has been completed. Transition to the next game when it has passed, and cancel the inability to insert medals at the beginning of the BET process of the next game, and enable the detection of the single BET switch 5 and the MAX BET switch 6),
The operation-time control prohibition canceling means controls the adjustment control means by the operation-time control prohibiting means when the game end determination means determines the end of the game in the game in which the second special prize has occurred. The winning control prohibition canceling means for canceling the prohibition (the CPU 41a validates the detection of the settlement switch 10 when it is determined that the game in which the big bonus (1) winning has occurred is finished).

  According to such a configuration, it is not possible to set the number of bets until a predetermined time elapses after the game in which the second special prize has occurred, that is, before the winning effect ends. The interest of the game is not impaired, and the player's own game value stored in the game value storage means can be returned even before the winning effect is finished. Reflected.

  In the above (1) to (4), the betting number setting prohibiting means, for example, allows a gaming medium to be returned even if a gaming medium used for setting the betting number is inserted, or a gaming value storing means. The setting of the bet number may be prohibited by invalidating the operation of the bet number setting operation means operated when the game value stored in the table is used for setting the bet number.

  In the operations (2) and (4), the operation-time control prohibiting means, for example, invalidates the operation of the payment operation means (game value return operation section), thereby adjusting the payment control according to the operation of the payment operation means. Control of the means may be prohibited.

(10) Data storage means (RAM 41c) having a storage area for storing data for controlling the game in a readable and writable manner;
Plural types of permissible stages having different ratios (winning probabilities) for determining whether or not the derivation of the winning display result corresponding to the winning is permitted based on the operation of the predetermined setting operation means (reset / setting switch 36) An allowable stage selection means (setting change process by the CPU 41a) for selecting one of the allowable stages from the (setting value);
The permissible step setting means (CPU 41a in the setting change process) sets the data indicating the permissible step selected by the permissible step selection means in the permissible step storage area (set value work) assigned to the storage area of the data storage means. Store the confirmed set value in the set value work)
Before the display result of the variable display device is derived, the data indicating the allowable stage stored in the allowable stage storage area (the set value stored in the set value work) is read, and the read data indicates Prior to deciding whether or not to allow the derivation of winning display results including a plurality of types of special winning display results corresponding to special winnings with a transition to a special gaming state advantageous to the player at a rate according to the allowable stage Determining means (the CPU 41a reads the set value in the internal lottery and determines whether or not a combination including a plurality of types of special combinations is won according to the winning probability of the read set value);
Permissible stage data judging means for judging whether or not the data indicating the permissible stage stored in the permissible stage storage area for each game is appropriate data indicating the permissible stage that can be selected by the permissible stage selecting means ( Set value determination processing 1) by the CPU 41a;
Disabling means (error processing by the CPU 41a) for disabling the progress of the game when the allowable stage data determination means determines that the data indicating the allowable stage stored in the allowable stage storage area is not appropriate data. )When,
After the progress of the game is disabled by the disabling means, the disabling of the progress of the game is canceled on the condition that the allowable stage is newly set by the allowable stage setting means, and the progress of the game And a disabling canceling means (a transition to a game process by the CPU 41a).

  According to such a configuration, it is determined for each game whether or not the data indicating the allowable stage that determines the rate at which the winning is allowed is appropriate, and it is determined that the data indicating the allowable stage is not appropriate. The game progress is disabled. That is, if the data indicating the allowable level is not appropriate data indicating the allowable level that can be selected by the allowable level selection means, the data indicating the allowable level may be illegally rewritten. Is disabled. The state where the progress of the game is disabled is canceled by newly selecting and setting an allowable stage (setting value) based on the operation of the setting operation means. For this reason, in order to restart the game when there is a possibility that the data indicating the allowable stage has been illegally rewritten, the operation of changing the allowable stage is more time-consuming than the reset operation for canceling the normal error. Since it is necessary, such fraud can be effectively prevented.

  Also, if there is a possibility that the data indicating the allowable stage has been illegally rewritten, the allowable stage selected and set based on the operation of the setting operation means, not the allowable stage automatically set by the slot machine Since the game is played based on (generally, the operation of the setting operation means is operated by an amusement shop employee, which is an allowable stage selected by the amusement shop side), the game is fair. be able to.

  Note that the permissible stage data determination means may be configured so that the main stage is at least once at any timing of one game (for example, at the start or end of a game, or when a process that is always executed for each game). What is necessary is just to determine whether or not the data indicating the allowable level stored in the data storage means is appropriate data indicating the allowable level selectable by the allowable level selecting means.

  Further, whether or not the permissible step data determination means is data indicating the permissible step stored in the main data storage means for each game is appropriate data indicating the permissible step that can be selected by the permissible step selection means. However, when the predetermined stage condition is satisfied instead of every game (for example, a game excluding a special game state advantageous to the player, etc.) Whether or not the data indicating the allowable level stored in the data storage means is appropriate data indicating the allowable level that can be selected by the allowable level selection means may be determined. A similar effect can be obtained.

(11) data storage means (RAM 41c) having a storage area for storing data for controlling the game in a readable and writable manner;
Plural types of permissible stages having different ratios (winning probabilities) for determining whether or not the derivation of the winning display result corresponding to the winning is permitted based on the operation of the predetermined setting operation means (reset / setting switch 36) An allowable stage selection means (setting change process by the CPU 41a) for selecting one of the allowable stages from the (setting value);
The permissible step setting means (CPU 41a in the setting change process) sets the data indicating the permissible step selected by the permissible step selection means in the permissible step storage area (set value work) assigned to the storage area of the data storage means. Store the confirmed set value in the set value work)
Before the display result of the variable display device is derived, the data indicating the allowable stage stored in the allowable stage storage area (the set value stored in the set value work) is read, and the read data indicates Prior to deciding whether or not to allow the derivation of winning display results including a plurality of types of special winning display results corresponding to special winnings with a transition to a special gaming state advantageous to the player at a rate according to the allowable stage Determining means (the CPU 41a reads the set value in the internal lottery and determines whether or not a combination including a plurality of types of special combinations is won according to the winning probability of the read set value);
Storage data determination means (determination of RAM parity and determination of destruction diagnosis data by the CPU 41a) for determining whether or not the data stored in the data storage means is normal;
Disabling means for disabling the progress of the game when the stored data determining means determines that the data stored in the data storing means is not normal (when the CPU 41a determines that the RAM data is abnormal) RAM error error state)
In a state where the progress of the game is disabled by the disabling means, the progress of the game is performed on the condition that the allowable stage is newly set by the allowable stage setting means based on the operation of the setting operation means. The disabling canceling means for canceling the disabled state and allowing the game to proceed (when the CPU 41a shifts to the RAM abnormal error state, the setting value is newly selected and set by the setting changing process, so that the game (Return to processing).

  According to such a configuration, when an abnormality occurs in the data stored in the data storage unit, the progress of the game is disabled, and an allowable stage (set value) is set based on the operation of the setting operation unit. If is not newly selected / set, the state where the progress of the game is disabled is not released. That is, even if an abnormality occurs in the data stored in the data storage means, it is not an allowable stage automatically set by the slot machine, but an allowable stage selected and set based on the operation of the setting operation means (general In addition, since the operation of the setting operation means is operated by an employee of the amusement store, it is ensured that the game is played based on the permissible stage selected by the amusement store side), so that the fairness of the game is to be achieved. Can do.

(12) The variable display device rotates display bands (reels 2L, 2C, and 2R) each having a plurality of types of distinguishable symbols by driving stepping motors (32L, 32C, and 32R). A display device having a plurality of variable display areas (left reel, middle reel, right reel) capable of variably displaying the symbol and capable of deriving and displaying a display result in each variable display area;
Prior determination means (internal lottery by the CPU 41a) for determining whether or not to allow a prize to be generated before a display result of at least one variable display area is derived;
Derivation operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) corresponding to each of the plurality of variable display areas, which are operated to derive and display the display results of the plurality of variable display areas,
Derivation control means (reel stop control by the CPU 41a) for performing control for deriving the display result of the variable display area corresponding to the derivation operation means when the derivation operation means is operated,
The derivation control means includes
In a situation where a display result has not yet been derived in any of the plurality of variable display areas, a derivation operation means corresponding to the variable display area is provided for the variable display area for which the display result has not yet been derived. A plurality of control patterns that uniquely specify a display result (stop position) derived with respect to the number of steps of the stepping motor at the time of operation (area number assigned for each number of steps of 1/2 symbols) From (reel stop control by the stop control table), control pattern selection means for uniquely selecting a control pattern corresponding to the determination result (internal lottery result) of the prior determination means (for all reels at the start of reel rotation) Select the corresponding data creation table, and create a stop control table corresponding to all reels from the selected data creation table. Includes a processing),
When the derivation operation means corresponding to the variable display area for which the display result has not yet been derived is operated, the control pattern selected for the variable display area by the control pattern selection means when the derivation operation means is operated Control for deriving the display result uniquely specified for the number of steps as the display result of the variable display area (control for stopping the reel at the stop position corresponding to the stop operation position with reference to the stop control table) Do.

  According to such a configuration, in a situation where display results are not yet derived for all of the plurality of variable display areas, the stepping motor at the time when the derivation operation means is operated for the variable display areas for which the display results are not yet derived. A control pattern corresponding to the determination result of the predetermining means is uniquely selected from a plurality of control patterns that uniquely specify the display result derived with respect to the number of steps, and the display result is derived to the corresponding variable display area. Control is performed. That is, there is only one control pattern applied to the determination result of one prior determination means, and it is not necessary to further select any one control pattern from a plurality of control patterns.

  The unique selection of the control pattern corresponding to the determination result of the prior determination unit means that the same control pattern is always selected when the determination result of the prior determination unit is the same. This does not prevent the selection of a common control pattern when the means determination results are different.

  The “control pattern that uniquely identifies the display result derived with respect to the number of steps of the stepping motor at the time when the derivation operation means is operated” refers to the number of steps at the time when the derivation operation means is operated. Is the control pattern in which the same display result is always specified as the derived display result. For example, the number of individual steps or the number of consecutive steps in a certain range (for example, one symbol varies) Derived from a variation amount table in which the variation amount until the display result is derived is determined for each identification code (for example, symbol number) that can identify the step number unit). A control pattern that uniquely identifies the display result derived for the number of steps when the operating means is operated, the number of individual steps, or within a certain range For each step number at the time when the derivation operation means is operated from the priority table in which the priority of the derived display result is determined for each successive step number unit or each identification code that can identify the step number unit. A control pattern that uniquely identifies a derived display result is applicable. In addition, from the number of steps at the time when the derivation operation means is operated, pull-in control is performed so that the display result to be pulled in is within the predetermined pull-in range, so that the derivation is prohibited from being displayed. For those that perform kick-off control that pulls in display results other than those for which derivation is prohibited, if the display result derived from the number of steps at the time when the derivation operation means is operated is uniquely specified, this This corresponds to the control pattern of the invention.

(13) A special game (regular bonus) in which the award winning (small bonus winning) occurs in the special gaming state with a higher probability than the normal gaming state until reaching a predetermined period (12 games or winning eight times) Period) special game control means to control (game end processing by the CPU 41a),
Special game determination means for determining whether or not the special game is controlled by the special game (the CPU 41a determines whether or not a regular bonus flag is set in the game end process);
The special game determination means determines whether or not the special game is controlled by the special game for each game in the special game state,
The special game control means starts control of the special game when the special game determination means determines that the special game is not controlled (the CPU 41a sets the regular bonus medium flag during the big bonus). If not, set a regular bonus medium flag).

  According to such a configuration, while being controlled in the special gaming state, it is determined whether or not the game is controlled by the special game for each game. If not controlled by the special game, the control of the special game is started. Thus, the gaming value can be increased most quickly in the special gaming state, so that the player's interest in the transition to the special gaming state is started rather than the control of the special game being started with some winning as in the past. Can be increased.

  Further, since it is determined whether or not each game is controlled by a special game, the control program for each game in the special game state can be shared, so that the program capacity can be reduced.

  Further, the award winning may be any game value as long as a winning is given, and the same type of winning award may be generated in the base game and the special game, or different types. May be awarded.

  The special game control means controlling the special game for a predetermined period of time when the special game starts, a predetermined number of games (one game or a plurality of games may be used). ) May be controlled until a special game is reached, or after the special game has started, a special game end condition (for example, a specified number of times (may be one or more) The game may be controlled to a special game until a winning is established). Furthermore, even if a special game is reached until a predetermined number of games is reached after a special game starts or a predetermined special game end condition is met, the special game is controlled. Good.

  Further, the special game control means may start control of the special game at the same time as the start of the special game state. In this case, the special game control means while the game is controlled to the special game state. Therefore, the control associated with the transition to the special gaming state can be simplified.

  Further, the special game determination means determines whether or not the special game is controlled at the end of each game, recognizes the game in which the transition winning is generated as a special gaming state, and generates the transition winning Even in such a game, it may be determined whether or not the game is controlled by the special game. Even in this case, it is only necessary to control the special game while the game is controlled to the special game state. The control associated with the transition to the special gaming state can be simplified.

  Further, the special game determination means may determine whether or not the game in which the transition prize has been generated is controlled by the special game at the start of each game without recognizing the game as a special game state. Even in this case, only the special game needs to be controlled while being controlled to the special game state, so that the control accompanying the transition to the special game state can be simplified.

(14) Predetermining means (internal lottery by the CPU 41a) for determining whether or not to allow the occurrence of winnings before the display result of the variable display device is derived;
Based on the determination result of the pre-determining means, abnormal winning determination data (permitted role) that can specify whether or not the winning is allowed in the game for each bit assigned for each type of winning. An abnormal winning determination data setting means (a special winning combination number and a winning combination flag) for setting an abnormal winning determination flag having a bit value assigned to 0 as 0 and a bit value assigned to an unacceptable role as 1 A process of converting the winning number of the general role into an internal winning flag in which the value of the bit assigned to the permitted role is set to 1 and the value of the bit assigned to the not allowed role is set to 0; Conversion to an abnormal winning determination flag by reversing all bits of the flag),
After the display result of the variable display device is derived, winning result data that can specify whether or not the winning has occurred for each bit assigned to each winning type based on the derived displaying result (winning result) Winning result data setting means for setting a winning symbol flag that sets the value of the bit assigned to the winning combination to 1 and the value of the bit assigned to the non-winning winning portion to 0 (stopped symbol after all reels are stopped) Process to create a winning design flag from
Calculation means for calculating the value of bits to which the same type of winning is assigned in the abnormal winning determination data set by the abnormal winning determination data setting means and the winning result data set by the winning result data setting means (Logical AND operation of abnormal winning determination flag and winning symbol flag),
Abnormal winning determination means for determining whether or not there is an abnormal winning based on the value of each bit calculated by the calculating means (determines whether the result of the logical product operation is 0 or not, that is, other than 0) And a process of determining an abnormal prize when there is even one value.

  According to such a configuration, when determining whether or not there is an abnormal winning, the value of the bits to which the same type of winning is assigned in the abnormal winning determination data and the winning result data is calculated, and the result It is possible to determine whether or not there is an abnormal win simply by determining whether or not it is necessary to specify the bit of the winning flag of the winning prize that has been established as in the past, and it is not necessary to check the value of the specified bit Therefore, it is possible to simplify the process for determining whether or not the prize is abnormal.

Embodiments of the present invention will be described below.
An embodiment of a slot machine to which the present invention is applied will be described with reference to the drawings. A slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment is rotated to a housing (not shown) whose front surface is open and a side end of the housing. It consists of a front door that is pivotally supported.

  Inside the casing of the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, reels 2L, 2C, and 2R (hereinafter also referred to as a left reel, a middle reel, and a right reel) in which a plurality of types of symbols are arranged on the outer periphery are arranged in the horizontal direction. As shown in FIG. 1, three consecutive symbols out of symbols arranged on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are arranged so that they can be seen from the see-through window 3 provided on the front door.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R have “red 7 (black 7 in the figure)”, “blue 7 (shaded 7 in the figure)”, “BAR”, “replay”, A plurality of types of mutually distinguishable symbols such as “watermelon”, “cherry”, and “bell” are drawn in a predetermined order. The symbols drawn on the outer peripheries of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three stages in the see-through window 3, respectively.

  The reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are provided in correspondence with each other and are rotated by reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R (see FIG. 3), so that the symbols of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are continuously provided in the see-through window 3. In addition to being displayed while changing, by stopping the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, three consecutive symbols are derived and displayed on the fluoroscopic window 3 as display results.

  Further, the front door is provided with a medal insertion unit 4 into which medals can be inserted, a medal payout port 9 through which medals are paid out, and credits (the number of medals stored as a game value owned by the player) for one medal. A single bet switch 5 operated when setting the bet number, and using a credit, a specified number of bets determined in accordance with the game state within the range (in this embodiment, in the normal game state described later) 3 is a MAXBET switch 6 that is operated when setting a regular bonus to be described later, 1), and the medals stored as credits and the medals used for setting the bets are settled (for setting credits and bets). The payout switch 10 operated when the medal used is returned), the start switch 7 operated when starting the game, the reels 2L, 2C, Stop switch 8L is operated to respectively stop the rotation of the R, 8C, 8R are provided.

  The front door also displays a credit indicator 11 for displaying the number of medals stored as credits, the number of medals acquired in a big bonus, which will be described later, and an error code indicating the contents when an error occurs. An auxiliary indicator 12 and a payout indicator 13 for displaying the number of medals paid out due to the occurrence of a prize are provided.

  Also, on the front door, 1 BET LED 14 that notifies that the bet number is set by 1 is lit, 2 BET LED 15 that notifies that the bet number is 2 is lit, and that 3 bets are set 3BETLED 16 to notify, the insertion request LED 17 to notify that the medal can be inserted by lighting, the start effective LED 18 to notify that the game start operation by the operation of the start switch 7 is effective, and the weight (previous game) (Waiting for starting reel rotation since a certain period of time has not elapsed since the start) LED 19 during waiting to notify that it is on, LED 20 during replay notifying that it is in a replay game to be described later Is provided.

  Further, inside the MAXBET switch 6, there is provided a BET switch valid LED 21 (see FIG. 3) for notifying that the betting number setting operation by the operation of the single BET switch 5 and the MAXBET switch 6 is effective. In the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, the left, middle, and right stop effective LEDs 22L, 22C, 22R that indicate that the reel stop operation by the corresponding stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is effective are turned on. (See FIG. 3).

  Further, inside the front door, a reset switch 23 for detecting a reset operation for canceling an error state excluding a RAM abnormality error described later and a stop state described later by a predetermined key operation, changing a set value described later And a set value indicator 24 for displaying the set value at that time during confirmation of the set value, and a flow path for medals inserted from the medal insertion unit 4, which will be described later, is provided in a hopper tank (not shown). ) Side or medal payout outlet 9 side, a flow path switching solenoid 30 for selectively switching, and a medal insertion sensor 31 for detecting a medal inserted from the medal insertion unit 4 and flowing down to the hopper tank side are provided. ing.

  Inside the casing, a reel unit (not shown) comprising the reels 2L, 2C and 2R, the reel motors 32L, 32C and 32R, and the reel sensor 33 capable of detecting the respective reel reference positions of the reels 2L, 2C and 2R. A hopper tank (not shown) for storing medals inserted from the medal insertion unit 4, a hopper motor 34 for paying out medals stored in the hopper tank from the medal payout opening 9, and paying out by driving the hopper motor 34. A payout sensor 35 for detecting a medal and a power supply box (not shown) are provided.

  On the front face of the power supply box, for enabling / disabling a stop function for controlling the stop state (a state in which the progress of the game is restricted until a reset operation is performed) at the end of a big bonus (1) described later. Stop switch 36, automatic checkout switch for selecting the validity / invalidity of the automatic checkout function that controls automatic checkout processing (to set up (return) medals stored as credits) at the end of a big bonus (1) described later 110, a setting key switch 37 for switching to the setting change mode at startup, and functioning as a reset switch for canceling an error state and a stop state except for a RAM abnormality error in a normal state. Reset / setting switch 3 that functions as a setting switch for changing the setting value of the winning probability (race rate) of the lottery , A power switch 39 which is operated to turn ON / OFF the power supply is provided.

  When a game is played in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, first, a medal is inserted from the medal insertion unit 4 or a bet number is set using a credit. In order to use credits, the single BET switch 5 or the MAX BET switch 6 may be operated. When a predetermined number of bets determined according to the gaming state are set, the pay lines L1 to L5 (see FIG. 1) become effective, and the operation of the start switch 7 is effective, that is, the game can be started. It becomes a state. In the present embodiment, three normal gaming states to be described later are determined as the prescribed number of bets, and one is determined in the regular bonus described later. If medals are inserted beyond the prescribed number corresponding to the gaming state, the amount is added to the credit.

  When the start switch 7 is operated in a state where the game can be started, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R rotate, and the symbols of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R continuously vary. When any one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is operated in this state, the rotation of the corresponding reels 2L, 2C, 2R is stopped, and the display result is derived and displayed on the fluoroscopic window 3.

  When one of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R is stopped, one game is completed, and a predetermined symbol combination (hereinafter also referred to as a role) is set on any of the activated pay lines L1 to L5. When the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped as a display result, a winning occurs, and a predetermined number of medals are given to the player and added to the credit. Further, when the credit reaches the upper limit number (50 in the present embodiment), medals are paid out directly from the medal payout opening 9 (see FIG. 1). If a combination of symbols with payout of medals is arranged on a plurality of activated pay lines, the total number of payouts determined for each combination of symbols arranged on the activated pay line is totaled. The total number of medals is awarded to the player. However, an upper limit (15 in this embodiment) is set for the number of medals to be awarded in one game. When the total number of medals exceeds the upper limit, the upper limit number of medals is given. Will be. In addition, when a combination of symbols accompanying the transition of the gaming state is stopped as a display result of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R on any of the activated pay lines L1 to L5, a game corresponding to the combination of symbols Transition to the state.

  FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the slot machine 1. As shown in FIG. 3, the slot machine 1 is provided with a game control board 40, an effect control board 90, and a power supply board 100. The game state is controlled by the game control board 40, and the game state is controlled by the effect control board 90. The power supply board 100 generates drive power for the electrical components constituting the slot machine 1 and supplies the drive power to each unit.

  The power supply board 100 is supplied with AC100V power from the outside, and from this AC100V power supply, a DC voltage necessary for driving electrical components constituting the slot machine 1 is generated, and the game control board 40 and the game control board 40 are generated. It is supplied to the production control board 90 connected through the. Further, the above-described hopper motor 34, payout sensor 35, stop switch 36, setting key switch 37, reset / setting switch 38, and power switch 39 are connected to the power supply substrate 100.

  Connected to the game control board 40 are the above-described one-sheet BET switch 5, MAXBET switch 6, start switch 7, stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, settlement switch 10, reset switch 23, insertion medal sensor 31, and reel sensor 33. In addition, the above-described payout sensor 35, stop switch 36, automatic settlement switch 110, setting key switch 37, and reset / setting switch 38 are connected via the power supply substrate 100, and detection of these connected switches is detected. A signal is input.

  Further, the game control board 40 includes the credit display 11, the game auxiliary display 12, the payout display 13, 1 to 3 BET LEDs 14 to 16, the insertion request LED 17, the start valid LED 18, the waiting LED 19, the replaying LED 10, and the BET. The switch effective LED 21, left, middle, and right stop effective LEDs 22L, 22C, and 22R, the set value display 24, the flow path switching solenoid 30, and the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R are connected to each other, and are described above via the power supply board 100. The hopper motor 34 is connected, and these electric components are driven based on control of a main control unit 41 described later mounted on the game control board 40.

  The game control board 40 includes a microcomputer having a CPU 41a, ROM 41b, RAM 41c, and I / O port 41d, a main control unit 41 for controlling the game, and random numbers in a predetermined range (0 to 16383 in the present embodiment). A random number generation circuit 42 that generates a random number, a sampling circuit 43 that acquires a random number from the random number generation circuit, and a switch detection circuit that detects a detection signal input from switches connected to the game control board 40 directly or via the power supply board 100 44, a motor drive circuit 45 that controls the drive of the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R, a solenoid drive circuit 46 that controls the drive of the flow path switching solenoid 30, and a drive control of various displays and LEDs connected to the game control board 40 LED drive circuit 47 for performing power supply voltage supplied to slot machine 1 A power interruption detection circuit 48 that monitors and detects a voltage drop when the voltage drop is detected, and outputs a voltage drop signal to the main control unit 41. When the power is turned on or when an initialization command is not input from the CPU 41a, the CPU 41a A reset circuit 49 for supplying a reset signal to the device and other various devices and circuits are mounted.

  The CPU 41a has an interrupt function (including an interrupt prohibition function) such as a timekeeping function and a timer interrupt, and executes a program (described later) stored in the ROM 41b to perform processing related to the progress of the game. Each part of the control circuit mounted on the control board 40 is controlled directly or indirectly. The ROM 41b stores fixed data such as programs executed by the CPU 41a and various tables. The RAM 41c is used as a work area when the CPU 41a executes a program. The I / O port 41d inputs / outputs a control signal to / from each circuit connected via a signal input / output terminal included in the main control unit 41.

  The main control unit 41 includes a signal input terminal DATA, and detection states of various switches connected to the game control board 40 are input to the input port via the signal input terminal DATA. The input states of these signal input terminals DATA are monitored by the CPU 41a, and the CPU 41a executes a basic process that shifts in stages according to the input states of the signal input terminals DATA, that is, the detection states of various switches.

  In addition, the CPU 41a has an interrupt function as described above, and can execute an interrupt process by interrupting the basic process when an interrupt occurs. In the present embodiment, four types of interrupts of interrupts 1 to 4 can be executed. For each interrupt, a counter mode (a signal from a trigger terminal CLK / TRG provided separately from the signal input terminal DATA) is provided. An interrupt mode that generates an external interrupt according to the input) or a timer mode (an interrupt mode that generates an internal interrupt according to the number of clock inputs of the CPU 41a) can be selected and set. .

  In the present embodiment, among interrupts 1 to 4, interrupt 2 is set to the counter mode, interrupt 3 is set to the timer mode, and interrupts 1 and 4 are unused. The trigger terminal CLK / TRG is connected to the above-described power failure detection circuit 48, and the CPU 41a generates an interrupt 2 in response to the input of the voltage drop signal output from the power failure detection circuit 48, and the power failure described later. Execute interrupt processing. Further, the CPU 41a generates an interrupt 3 every time the number of clock inputs reaches a certain number, that is, every certain time interval (about 0.56 ms in the present embodiment), and a timer interruption process (main) described later. Execute. Moreover, although the interrupts 1 and 4 are set to unused, the interrupts 1 and 4 may generate | occur | produce by noise etc. For this reason, when interrupts 1 and 4 occur, the CPU 41a executes an unused interrupt process that immediately returns to the original process.

  The CPU 41a is set to prohibit other interrupts during execution of interrupt processing based on the occurrence of any one of interrupts 1 to 4, and a plurality of interrupts occurred simultaneously. In this case, interrupts to be executed with priority in the order of interrupts 2, 3, 1, 4 are set. In other words, when interrupt 2 and other interrupts occur simultaneously, interrupt 2 is prioritized and when interrupt 3 and interrupt 1 or 4 occur simultaneously, interrupt 3 is prioritized. To run.

  Further, the CPU 41a temporarily stores the data in use stored in the register in a later-described stack area provided in the RAM 41c at the start of interrupt processing based on the occurrence of any of the interrupts 1 to 4. The data saved in the stack area at the end of the interrupt process is returned to the register.

  As the RAM 41c, a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) is used, and a refresh operation is required to maintain the stored data contents. The CPU 41a is provided with a refresh register for performing this refresh operation. The refresh register is composed of 8 bits, and the lower 7 bits are automatically incremented every time the CPU 41a fetches an instruction from the ROM 41b, and the value is updated every execution time of one instruction. .

  The main control unit 41 is also supplied with backup power even during a power failure, and while the backup power is being supplied, the CPU 41a performs a refresh operation to hold the data stored in the RAM 41c. It is like that.

  In addition, the CPU 41a acquires the state of the stop switch 36 at the time of activation, sets the enable / disable of the stop function in a specific register of the CPU 41a, acquires the state of the automatic settlement switch 110, and sets the CPU 41a The automatic settlement function is enabled / disabled in a specific register. As described above, the states of the stop switch 36 and the automatic checkout switch 110 are acquired only in an activation process described later, and the validity / invalidity of the stop and automatic checkout function is set based on the acquired state. Therefore, even if the stop switch 36 or the automatic checkout switch 110 is operated in the game process after the start process, the stop / automatic checkout function is not newly set to be valid / invalid.

  The random number generation circuit 42 is configured by a counter that counts up and updates the value every time a predetermined number of pulses are generated, as will be described later, and the sampling circuit 43 acquires the numerical value counted by the random number generation circuit 42. . The random number generation circuit 42 defines a range of numerical values to be counted for each type of random number. In the present embodiment, 0 to 16383 is defined as the range. The CPU 41a sends an instruction to the sampling circuit 43 in accordance with the processing to acquire the numerical value indicated by the random number generation circuit 42 as a random number (this function is hereinafter referred to as a hardware random number function). Random numbers for internal lottery, which will be described later, are not used as they are extracted by the hardware random number function, but are processed and used by software. Details thereof will be described in detail. The CPU 41a also has a function of updating a numerical value of a specific register by the above-described timer interrupt process (main), and acquiring the updated numerical value as a random number (hereinafter, this function is referred to as a software random number function).

  The CPU 41a transmits various commands to the effect control board 90 via the I / O port 41d. A command transmitted from the game control board 40 to the effect control board 90 is sent in only one direction, and no command is sent from the effect control board 90 to the game control board 40. The transmission line of the command transmitted from the game control board 40 to the effect control board 90 is composed of a strobe (INT) signal line, a data transmission line, and a ground line, and is connected via the effect relay board 80. The game control board 40 and the effect control board 90 are not directly connected.

  Electrical components such as a liquid crystal display 51 (see FIG. 1), a rendering effect LED 52, speakers 53 and 54, and a reel LED 55 disposed on the front door of the slot machine 1 are connected to the rendering control board 90. The components are driven based on control by a later-described sub-control unit 91 mounted on the effect control board 90.

  The effect control board 90 is composed of a microcomputer having a CPU 91a, a ROM 91b, a RAM 91c, and an I / O port 91d in the same manner as the main control part 41. The effect control board 90 includes a sub control unit 91 for effect control and an effect control board 90. A liquid crystal driving circuit 92 for controlling the driving of the connected liquid crystal display 51, a lamp driving circuit 93 for controlling the driving of the effect LED 52 and the reel LED 55, an audio output circuit 94 for controlling the audio output from the speakers 53 and 54, and a power source A reset circuit 95 that gives a reset signal to the CPU 91a when it is turned on or when an initialization command is not input from the CPU 91a, and other circuits are mounted. The CPU 91a receives a command transmitted from the game control board 40. In addition to performing various controls to produce effects, Directly or indirectly controls each unit of the onboard control circuit 90.

  Similar to the CPU 41a of the main control unit 41, the CPU 91a has an interrupt function (including an interrupt prohibition function) such as a timer interrupt. An interrupt terminal (not shown) of the sub-control unit 91 is connected to a strobe (INT) signal line that is output when the main control unit 41 transmits a command among command transmission lines. An interrupt is generated based on the input to acquire a command from the main control unit 41 and execute a command reception interrupt process to be stored in the buffer. The CPU 91a executes a timer interrupt process (sub) to be described later by generating an interrupt every time the number of clock inputs reaches a certain number, that is, every certain interval. Also, when an unused interrupt occurs in the CPU 91a, an unused interrupt process for immediately returning to the original process is executed.

  Further, unlike the CPU 41a, when an interrupt is generated based on the input of the strobe signal (INT), the CPU 91a interrupts the process even when an interrupt process based on another interrupt is being executed. The command reception interrupt process is executed at the top, and even if another interrupt occurs at the same time, the command reception interrupt process is executed with the highest priority.

  The sub-control unit 91 is also supplied with backup power in the event of a power failure, and while the backup power is supplied, the CPU 91a performs a refresh operation so that the data stored in the RAM 91c is retained. It has become.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the medal payout rate changes according to the set value, and the winning probability of the internal lottery described later is determined according to the set value. Hereinafter, the setting value changing operation will be described.

  In order to change the setting value, it is necessary to turn on the power of the slot machine 1 after the setting key switch 37 is turned on. When the power is turned on with the setting key switch 37 in the ON state, 1 is displayed as the initial value of the setting value on the setting value display 24, and the setting change mode in which the setting value can be changed by operating the reset / setting switch 38 is set. Transition. When the reset / setting switch 38 is operated in the setting change mode, the setting value displayed on the setting value display 24 is updated one by one (when further operation is performed from the setting 6, the setting value is returned to the setting 1). . When the start switch 7 is operated, the set value is confirmed, and the confirmed set value is stored in the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41. Then, when the setting key switch 37 is turned off, the state shifts to a state in which the game can proceed.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the power interruption interrupt process is executed when the CPU 41a of the main control unit 41 detects the voltage drop signal. In the power interruption interrupt processing, a register is saved in a stack of a RAM 41c, which will be described later, and data for destructive diagnosis (in this embodiment, 5AH) in which any bit is 1 in the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41, that is, other than 0 Specific data is stored, and the RAM parity adjustment data is calculated so that the RAM parity based on the data stored in all areas of the RAM 41c becomes 0, and stored in the RAM 41c. . Note that the RAM parity is a value calculated as an exclusive OR of values stored in each bit of the corresponding area (all areas in the present embodiment) of the RAM 41c. Therefore, if the RAM parity based on the data stored in all areas of the RAM 41c is 0, the RAM parity adjustment data is 0, and the RAM parity based on the data stored in all areas of the RAM 41c is 1. In this case, the RAM parity adjustment data is 1.

  The CPU 41a calculates the RAM parity based on the data stored in all areas of the RAM 41c at the time of activation, confirms the value of the destructive diagnosis data, the RAM parity is 0, and the destructive diagnosis On the condition that the data value is also correct, the processing state of the CPU 41a is restored to the state before the power interruption based on the data stored in the RAM 41c, but when the RAM parity is not 0 (in the case of 1) or for destructive diagnosis If the data value is not correct, it is determined that the RAM is abnormal, and a RAM abnormal error code is set in the register to control the RAM abnormal error, thereby disabling the progress of the game. Unlike the other error states, the RAM abnormal error state is not canceled even if the reset switch 23 or the reset / setting switch 38 is operated, and a new set value is set in the setting change mode described above. It will not be released until

  Further, the CPU 41a determines whether or not the bet number set in the game in the internal lottery process described later is a bet number corresponding to the gaming state. And even when the set bet number is not the bet number according to the gaming state, it is determined that the RAM is abnormal, and the RAM abnormal error code is set and controlled to the RAM abnormal error state, so that the progress of the game is disabled. It is like that. As described above, the RAM abnormal error state is not canceled even if the reset switch 23 or the reset / setting switch 38 is operated unlike the other error states, and a new setting is made in the setting change mode described above. It will not be released until a value is set.

  Further, the CPU 41a executes a set value determination process for determining whether or not a set value used for the internal lottery in the internal lottery process described later is an appropriate value.

  In the set value determination process, the set value determination process 1 for determining whether or not the set value used for the internal lottery is within an appropriate range (1 to 6), the set value used for the internal lottery, and the setting set when the setting is changed Setting value determination processing 2 for determining whether or not the values match, whether the setting value used for the internal lottery of the current game and the setting value used for the internal lottery of the previous game match The set value determination process 3 to be determined is executed for each game.

  In the setting value determination process 1, when the setting value used for the internal lottery is not a value in the proper range, or in the setting value determination process 2, the setting value used for the internal lottery, the setting value set when the setting is changed, If the set values do not match or the set value used for the internal lottery of the current game does not match the set value used for the internal lottery of the previous game in the set value determination process 3, it is determined that the RAM is abnormal. The RAM abnormal error code is set and controlled to the RAM abnormal error state to disable the progress of the game. As described above, the RAM abnormal error state is not canceled even if the reset switch 23 or the reset / setting switch 38 is operated unlike the other error states, and a new setting is made in the setting change mode described above. It will not be released until a value is set.

  In the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the prescribed number of bets that can be set according to the gaming state is determined as described above, and the prescribed number of bets that are determined according to the gaming state is set. It becomes possible to start the game on the condition. In the present embodiment, as will be described later, there are a regular bonus and a normal gaming state as the gaming state, and among these, 1 is defined as the prescribed number of bets corresponding to the regular bonus, which corresponds to the normal gaming state. 3 is defined as the prescribed number of bets. For this reason, when the gaming state is a regular bonus, the game can be started when the betting number is set to 1, and when the gaming state is the normal gaming state, the game is started when the betting number is set to 3. Can be started. In the present embodiment, when a specified number of bets according to the gaming state is set, all the winning lines L1 to L5 are activated, and the specified number according to the gaming state. If 1 is set, all pay lines L1 to L5 are activated at the time when 1 is set as the bet number, and if the specified number according to the gaming state is 3, the point at which 3 is set as the bet number Thus, all winning lines L1 to L5 are activated.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped, the winning line that is activated (in this embodiment, all the winning lines are always activated, In the following description, an activated winning line is simply referred to as a winning line). The type of winning combination is determined according to the game state, but it can be roughly divided into a small role with payout of medals and a replay that can start the next game without the need to set the number of bets. There are a game combination and a special combination with a transition of the game state. Below, a small role and a re-playing role are collectively called a general role. In order for winning of each combination determined according to the gaming state to occur, it is necessary to win an internal lottery to be described later and set a winning flag of the combination in the RAM 41c.

  Among the winning flags for each of these combinations, the winning flag for the small role and the replaying role is valid only in the game in which the flag is set, and is invalid in the next game, but the special flag winning flag is It is valid until a combination of combinations permitted by the flag is completed, and is invalid in a game having a combination of combinations permitted. In other words, once the special combination winning flag is won, even if the combination of the combination permitted by the flag cannot be made, the winning flag is not invalidated and is carried over to the next game. It becomes.

  FIG. 4A shows the winning combination table. The winning combination table is stored in advance in the ROM 41b of the main control unit 41, and the combination numbers (1 to 14) assigned in the order in which the lottery is performed corresponding to combinations of combinations and combinations to be selected in the internal drawing. ) Is registered.

  In the slot machine 1, as a special role, a big bonus (1), a big bonus (2), a regular bonus, a cherry, 1 (1), 1 (2), and a bell as a small role are replayed. Replay is defined as a role. In addition, the combinations of the combinations in the slot machine 1 include big bonus (1) + cherry, big bonus (2) + cherry, big bonus (1) +1 (1), big bonus (2) +1 (1), Big bonus (1) +1 (2) and big bonus (2) +1 (2) are defined. That is, the total of the combination of combinations and combinations is 14.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4 (a), the combination of combinations and combinations of combinations that are subject to lottery depending on whether the gaming state is a normal gaming state or a regular bonus. Different. Furthermore, when the gaming state is the normal gaming state, it depends on whether any special role is being carried over (whether any special role has already been set in the winning flag of the special role). Also, the combination and combination of combinations that are subject to lottery are different. In the present embodiment, a state number corresponding to the gaming state is assigned, and when performing an internal lottery, a state number corresponding to the current gaming state is set, and a role to be a lottery object according to this state number Can be specified. Specifically, when no special combination is carried over in the normal gaming state, “0” is set as the state number, and when any special combination is carried over in the normal gaming state, “1” is set as the state number, and “2” is set as the state number in the case of a regular bonus.

  As shown in FIG. 4A, when the gaming state is the normal gaming state and no special combination is carried over, that is, when the state number is set to “0”, the big bonus (1 ), Big Bonus (2), Regular Bonus, Big Bonus (1) + Cherry, Big Bonus (2) + Cherry, Big Bonus (1) + 1 (1), Big Bonus (2) + 1 (1), Big Bonus (1) + 1 (2), Big Bonus (2) + 1 (2), Replay, Cherry, 1 (1), 1 (2), Bell, that is, all combinations of combinations and combinations It becomes the object of. When the game state is the normal game state and any special role is carried over, that is, when the state number is set to “1”, replay, cherry, 1 (1), 1 The sheet (2), the bell, that is, the combination of the combination and combination after the combination number 10 is an object of the internal lottery. When the game state is a regular bonus, that is, “3” is set as the state number, cherry, 1 (1), 1 (2), bell, that is, the role and the combination of the combination after the combination number 11 The combination is subject to internal lottery.

  Cherry is awarded when the “Cherry” symbol is derived on one of the winning lines for the left reel in any gaming state, and two medals are paid out in the normal gaming state. 15 medals are paid out. When the “cherry” symbol stops at the top or bottom of the left reel, the combination of cherries is aligned on the two pay lines L2, L4 or the pay lines L3, L5. Since you won the cherry on the winning line, 4 medals will be paid out in the normal gaming state, but in the regular bonus, even if you win the cherry on the 2 winning lines, one game Since the upper limit of the number of medals to be paid out at 15 is set to 15, only 15 medals are paid out. One (1) is awarded when the combination of “Blue 7-Red 7-Watermelon” is aligned on any of the winning lines in any gaming state, and one medal is paid out in the normal gaming state. In the regular bonus, 15 medals are paid out. One (2) is awarded when the combination of “Red 7-Blue 7-Watermelon” is aligned on any of the winning lines in any gaming state, and one medal is paid out in the normal gaming state. In the regular bonus, 15 medals are paid out. A bell is awarded when a combination of “Bell-Bell-Bell” is placed on any of the winning lines in any gaming state, and 8 medals are paid out in the normal gaming state. 15 medals are paid out.

  Replay is awarded when a combination of “Replay-Replay-Replay” is aligned on any of the winning lines in the normal gaming state, but with a regular bonus, even if this combination is aligned, no replay is awarded. When a replay is won, the medals will not be paid out, but the next game can be started without setting the number of bets again, so the number of bets no longer required to be set in the next game (the regular bonus will not be replayed and will always be 3) This is substantially the same as when three corresponding medals are paid out.

  The regular bonus is awarded when a combination of “red 7-red 7-BAR” is arranged on any of the winning lines in the normal gaming state. When the regular bonus is won, the gaming state shifts from the normal gaming state to the regular bonus. The regular bonus ends when 12 games are consumed, or when 8 games are won (any kind of combination is possible), whichever comes first. While the game state is in the regular bonus, the regular bonus medium flag is set in the RAM 41c.

  The big bonus is awarded when a combination of “red 7-red 7-red 7” or a combination of “blue 7-blue 7-blue 7” is arranged on any of the winning lines in the normal gaming state. When the big bonus is won, the gaming state shifts to the big bonus. When transitioning to the big bonus, the transition to the regular bonus is performed at the same time as the transition to the big bonus, and when the regular bonus ends, if the big bonus has not ended, the transition to the regular bonus is repeated again until the big bonus ends Controlled by regular bonus. That is, during the big bonus, the regular bonus is always controlled. The big bonus ends when the total number of medals paid out to the player in the big bonus reaches a predetermined number (301 or 466 in this embodiment). At this time, the regular bonus is ended regardless of whether the regular bonus end condition is satisfied. While the game state is the big bonus, the big bonus medium flag is set in the RAM 41c.

  In the present embodiment, the big bonus due to “red 7-red 7-red 7” and the big bonus due to “blue 7-blue 7-blue 7” have different end conditions. A big bonus (1) that shifts when a combination of “red 7-red 7-red 7” is aligned on any of the lines, and “blue 7- It is distinguished from the big bonus (2) which shifts when a combination of “blue 7-blue 7” is completed and a winning occurs. Note that the regular bonus, the big bonus (1), and the big bonus (2) described above may be simply referred to as “bonus”.

  Specifically, the end condition of the big bonus (1) is that the total number of payouts in the big bonus reaches 466 (second specified value), and the end condition of the big bonus (2) is the total number of payouts in the big bonus Reaches 301 sheets (first specified value). In other words, the big bonus (1) ends in a game in which the conditions for ending the big bonus (1) are satisfied, that is, a game in which some winnings occur and the total number of payouts in the big bonus exceeds 465 cards. 2) ends in a game in which the condition for ending the big bonus (2) is satisfied, that is, a game in which some winnings occur and the total number of payouts in the big bonus exceeds 300.

  In this embodiment, since the big bonus (1) is set to end as the stop condition and the automatic checkout condition, the stop function is set to be effective in the game in which the big bonus (1) is ended. If it is determined that the game has been completed, the game is controlled to be stopped. If the automatic payment function is set to be effective in the game in which the big bonus (1) has been completed, When it is determined that the process has been completed, a settlement process described later is performed. Also, in the game in which the big bonus (1) has been completed, when both the stop function and the automatic settlement function are set to be effective, the settlement process is performed when it is determined that the game is terminated, and then the batting is performed. It is controlled to the stop state. In addition, in the game in which the big bonus (2) has ended, the control of the stop state and the automatic check-out process are not performed regardless of whether the stop function or the automatic check-out function is enabled.

  Hereinafter, the internal lottery of the present embodiment will be described. In the internal lottery, it is determined whether or not the above winning combination is permitted before the display results of all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are derived and displayed (actually, when the start switch 7 is detected). To do. In the internal lottery, first, a random number for internal lottery (an integer from 0 to 16383) is acquired as described later. Then, for each combination and combination of roles determined according to the gaming state, according to the acquired random number for internal lottery and the number of judgment values of the combination of each combination and combination determined according to the gaming state and setting value It is done. In the present embodiment, from the number of judgment values of each combination and combination of combinations, the range of determination values for each of the general combination and special combination, and the determination value for winning the combination of general combination and special combination The range is specified, and the winning in the internal lottery is not exclusive, and a general combination and a special combination may be won simultaneously in one game.

  Each combination and combination of combinations determined according to the game state is referred to in the order of combination numbers registered in the winning combination table shown in FIG.

  When the gaming state is the normal gaming state and no special role is carried over, that is, when the state number is set to “0”, the winning combination table is referred to and the combination of the combination numbers 1 to 14 is referred to. And combinations of combinations, that is, big bonus (1) [port number 1], big bonus (2) [port number 2], regular bonus [port number 3], big bonus (1) + cherry [port number 4], big Bonus (2) + cherry [role number 5], big bonus (1) +1 (1) [role 6], big bonus (2) +1 (1) [role 7], big bonus (1) +1 Sheet (2) [Role No. 8], Big Bonus (2) +1 (2) [Role No. 9], Replay [Role No. 10], Cherry [Role No. 11], 1 (1) [Role No. 12] 1 (2) [role number 13], bell Role ID NO: 14] is read out in the order as the target role of internal lottery.

  When the gaming state is the normal gaming state and any special combination is carried over, that is, when the status number is set to “1”, the winning combination table is referred to and the combination numbers 10 to 10 are referred to. 14 roles and combinations of roles, that is, replay [role number 10], cherry [role number 11], 1 sheet (1) [role number 12], 1 sheet (2) [role number 13], bell [role number 14 ] Are sequentially read out as a target combination of the internal lottery.

  Further, when the game state is a regular bonus, that is, “2” is set as the state number, the winning combination table is referred to and combinations of the combinations of the combination numbers 11 to 14, that is, cherry [portion number 11] 1 sheet (1) [port number 12], 1 sheet (2) [port number 13], and bell [port number 14] are sequentially read out as the internal lottery target roles.

  In the internal lottery, the number of judgment values determined for the combination or combination of roles subject to internal lottery is sequentially added to the random number for internal lottery, and when the result of the addition overflows, the combination of the combination or combination It is judged that it was won.

  When a winning combination of any combination or combination of roles is determined, a special combination storing work and a general combination storing work assigned to the RAM 41c with a winning flag corresponding to the combination of winning combination or combination determined to be winning Set to. Specifically, when any of the roles (special roles) of the role numbers 1 to 3 is won, a special role winning flag indicating that the special role is won is set in the special role storing work, and the general role is stored. Clear the winning flag set for the workpiece. In addition, when any of the role numbers 4 to 9 (special role + general role) is won, a special role winning flag indicating that the special role is won is set in the special role storing work, A winning combination flag indicating that the general combination is won is set in the general combination storing work. If any of the combination numbers 10 to 14 (general combination) is won, a general combination winning flag indicating that the general combination is won is set in the general combination storing work. If no winning combination or combination of winning combinations is won, only the general winning combination work is cleared.

  The number of determination values for each combination and combination of combinations is read according to the storage address of the number of determination values registered in the role-specific table stored in advance in the ROM 41b of the main control unit 41.

  FIG. 4B is a diagram illustrating an example of the role-specific table. The number of determination values may be 256 or more, and cannot be stored in one byte. Therefore, the number of determination values is registered using a storage area of 2 bytes for each number of determination values. The number of determination values is registered in correspondence with the above-described state number that can specify the gaming state. This is because even if the combination is the same combination or combination, the winning probabilities may differ depending on the gaming state. The number of determination values may be common regardless of the set value, or may be different depending on the set value. If the number of determination values is common regardless of the set value, a common flag is set (value is set to “1”).

  In the role-specific table, as shown in FIG. 4B, a big bonus (1), a big bonus (2), a regular bonus, a big bonus (1) + cherry, a big bonus (2) + cherry, a big bonus ( 1) +1 (1), Big Bonus (2) +1 (1), Big Bonus (1) +1 (2), Big Bonus (2) +1 (2), Replay, Cherry, 1 (1) One (2), the storage address of the number of determination values of the bell is registered.

  Big Bonus (1), Big Bonus (2), Regular Bonus, Big Bonus (1) + Cherry, Big Bonus (2) + Cherry, Big Bonus (1) +1 (1), Big Bonus (2) +1 ( 1), Big Bonus (1) + 1 (2), Big Bonus (2) + 1 (2) are the roles that are subject to internal lottery when no special roles are carried over in the normal gaming state The storage address of the number of determination values corresponding to the state number 0 is registered. For the big bonus (1), the big bonus (2), and the regular bonus, the common flag is 0, and the storage address of the number of determination values is individually registered according to the set value. Big Bonus (1) + Cherry, Big Bonus (2) + Cherry, Big Bonus (1) +1 (1), Big Bonus (2) +1 (1), Big Bonus (1) +1 (2), Big For bonus (2) +1 (2), the common flag is 1, and the storage address of the common number of determination values is registered regardless of the set value.

  Replay is a combination that is subject to internal lottery regardless of whether or not a special combination is carried over in the normal gaming state, and a storage address for the number of determination values corresponding to state numbers 0 and 1 is registered. The common flag for this combination is 1, and a common storage address for the number of determination values is registered regardless of the set value.

  Cherry, 1 (1), 2 (2) are the roles that are subject to internal lottery in any gaming state, the storage address of the number of determination values corresponding to state numbers 0 and 1, state number 2 And the storage address of the number of determination values corresponding to each are registered. The common flag for this combination is 1, and a common storage address for the number of determination values is registered regardless of the set value.

  The bell is a role that is subject to internal lottery in any gaming state, and has a storage address for the number of determination values corresponding to state numbers 0 and 1 and a storage address for the number of determination values corresponding to state number 2. Each is registered. The common flag for this combination is 0, and the storage address for the number of determination values is individually registered according to the set value.

  In addition, the number of medals to be paid out when winning each winning combination is also registered in the role-specific table. However, only the cherry, which is a small role, 1 (1), 1 (2), and a bell, is a target for paying out medals when winning a prize. These small roles can be awarded in any gaming state, but when the state number is 2, that is, when the gaming state is a regular bonus, when the state number is 0, that is, the gaming state More medals are paid out than when in the normal gaming state. Further, when “cherry” stops at the upper or lower stage of the left reel, the combination of cherries is aligned on the two pay lines as described above, so the total number of payouts is paid out. It will be. In the present embodiment, since the number of cherries paid out is 2 in the normal gaming state, 4 medals are paid out. In the regular bonus, the number of cherries paid out is 15, but the total number exceeds the upper limit of 15, so in this case, 15 medals are paid out.

  The big bonus (1), the big bonus (2), and the regular bonus winning are accompanied by a transition of the gaming state, and are not eligible for paying out medals. The replay does not involve the payout of medals, but it is substantially the same as the payout of 3 medals since it is not necessary to insert medals used for setting the bet amount in the next game (always the normal gaming state).

  FIG. 5 is a diagram illustrating a storage area for the number of determination values acquired based on addresses registered in the role-specific table. The storage area for the number of determination values is provided in the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41 in the development model, and in the address area allocated to the ROM 41b in the main control unit 41 in the mass production model.

  For example, when the address ADD is a game state of state number 0, that is, in a state where no special combination is carried over in the normal game state, the target combination of the internal lottery is the big bonus (1) and the set value is 1. This is an address to be referred to. At this time, 15 which is a value stored here is acquired as the number of determination values. Addresses ADD + 2, ADD + 4, ADD + 6, ADD + 8, and ADD + 10 are addresses that are referred to when the target role of the internal lottery is the big bonus (1) and the set value is 2 to 6 in the gaming state of state number 0. . Addresses ADD + 12, ADD + 14, ADD + 16, ADD + 18, ADD + 20, and ADD + 22 are addresses that are referred to when the internal lottery target role is the big bonus (2) and the set value is 1 to 6 in the game state of state number 0. It is. Addresses ADD + 24, ADD + 26, ADD + 28, ADD + 30, ADD + 32, and ADD + 34 are addresses that are referred to when the target character of the internal lottery is a regular bonus and the set value is 1 to 6, respectively, in the gaming state of state number 0.

  Regarding the big bonus (1) and big bonus (2) in the gaming state of state number 0, that is, in the state where no special combination is carried over in the normal gaming state, the number of judgment values is individually stored according to the set value. In addition, since different numbers of determination values are stored, the winning probabilities of these combinations and combinations of combinations differ depending on the set values.

  On the other hand, for the regular bonus in the game state of state number 0, that is, in the state where no special combination is carried over in the normal game state, the number of determination values is individually stored according to the set value. Since the number of determination values is stored, the regular bonus winning probability is the same for any set value.

  In addition, the address ADD + 36 is set to the set value when the internal lottery target role is big bonus (1) + cherry in the game state of state number 0, that is, in the state where no special role is carried over in the normal game state. Regardless of the address to be referred to, the address ADD + 38 is the big bonus (2) + in the game state of the state number 0, that is, in the normal game state where no special combination is carried over. This address is referred to regardless of the set value when it is a cherry, and the address ADD + 40 is an object of the internal lottery in the game state of the state number 0, that is, in the state where no special role is carried over in the normal game state This address is referenced regardless of the setting value when the winning combination is a big bonus (1) + 1 (1) The address ADD + 42 is a set value when the internal lottery target role is a big bonus (2) +1 piece (1) in the game state of state number 0, that is, in a state where no special combination is carried over in the normal game state Regardless of the address that is referenced, the address ADD + 44 is a big bonus (1) in the game state of state number 0, that is, in the normal game state where no special combination is carried over. +1 (2) is an address that is referred to regardless of the set value, and the address ADD + 46 is an internal number in the game state where the special number is not carried over in the state number 0, that is, the normal game state. This address is referred to regardless of the set value when the target combination of the lottery is big bonus (2) +1 (2).

  The address ADD + 48 is an address that is referred to regardless of the set value when the state number is 0 and the state number is 1, that is, in the normal gaming state, the target combination of the internal lottery is replay.

  The address ADD + 50 is an address that is referred to regardless of the setting value when the state number is 0 and the state number is 1, that is, in the normal gaming state, when the subject combination of the internal lottery is cherry. The address ADD + 52 is an address that is referred to regardless of the set value when the state number is 2, that is, in the regular bonus, when the target character of the internal lottery is cherry.

  The address ADD + 54 is an address that is referred to regardless of the set value when the state number is 0 and the state number is 1, that is, in the normal gaming state, when the number of the internal lottery target is one (1). The address ADD + 56 is an address that is referred to regardless of the set value when the state number is 2, that is, in the regular bonus, when the number of the internal lottery target is one (1).

  The address ADD + 58 is an address that is referred to regardless of the set value when the state number is 0 and the state number is 1, that is, in the normal gaming state, when the number of the internal lottery target is one (2). The address ADD + 60 is an address that is referred to regardless of the set value when the state number is 2, that is, in the regular bonus, when the number of the internal lottery target is one (2).

  Addresses ADD + 62, ADD + 64, ADD + 66, ADD + 68, ADD + 70, and ADD + 72 are in the game state of state number 0 and state number 1, that is, in the normal game state, and the target role of the internal lottery is Bell and the set value is 1 to 6, respectively. This address is referred to by Addresses ADD + 74, ADD + 76, ADD + 78, ADD + 80, ADD + 82, and ADD + 84 are addresses that are referenced when the target number of the internal lottery is the bell and the set value is 1 to 6 in the game state of state number 2, that is, regular bonus. It is. Regarding the bell in the gaming state of the gaming state 2, the number of determination values is individually stored according to the set value, but the number of determination values of the setting values 1 and 2, the number of determination values of 3 and 4, 5 and 6 Since the common determination value number is stored in each of the determination value numbers, the winning probabilities of the setting values 1 and 2 are the same, the winning probabilities of the 3 and 4 are common.

  FIGS. 6A to 6C are diagrams illustrating an example of a relationship between a value of a random number for internal lottery, the number of determination values of each combination and combination of combinations, and winning. FIG. 6 (a) shows a case where no special combination is carried over in the normal gaming state, and FIG. 6 (b) shows a case where any special combination is carried over in the normal gaming state. Here are examples of regular bonuses. 6A to 6C show an example in which the set value is 6.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 6A, when no special combination is carried over in the normal gaming state, the big bonus (1), the big bonus (2), the regular bonus, the big bonus (1) + Cherry, Big Bonus (2) + Cherry, Big Bonus (1) +1 (1), Big Bonus (2) +1 (1), Big Bonus (1) +1 (2), Big Bonus (2) +1 (2), Replay, Cherry, 1 (1), 1 (2), and Bell are subject to internal lottery, and in the set value 6, the number of determination values for each combination is 20, 20, 31, 10 10, 5, 5, 5, 5, 2245, 96, 163, 163, 2082. First, the big bonus (1) subject to the internal lottery is determined by adding the judgment value number of 20 and the result of addition overflows when 16364 to 16383 are acquired as random numbers for the internal lottery. Become.

  Next, the big bonus (2) that is the subject of the internal lottery is obtained by adding 40, which is the sum of the judgment value number 20 of the big bonus (1) and the judgment value number 20 of the big bonus (2). The winning combination is obtained when 16344 to 16363, which will overflow, are obtained as random numbers for internal lottery. Similarly, the regular bonus is a big bonus when 16313 to 16343 is acquired as a random number for internal lottery, and the big bonus (1) + cherry is a big bonus when 16303 to 1631 is acquired as a random number for internal lottery. (2) + Cherry is obtained when 16293-16302 is obtained as a random number for internal lottery, Big Bonus (1) +1 (1) is obtained when 16288-16292 is obtained as a random number for internal lottery , Big Bonus (2) + 1 (1), 16283-16287 are acquired as random numbers for internal lottery, Big Bonus (1) + 1 (2), random numbers for internal lottery are 16278-16282 As a big bonus (2) + 1 (2), 16273-16277 are random numbers for internal lottery The replay is obtained when 14028-16272 is obtained as a random number for internal lottery, and the cherry is obtained when 13932-14027 is obtained as a random number for internal lottery (1 ) When 13769-13931 is acquired as a random number for internal lottery, 1 (2), when 13606-13768 is acquired as a random number for internal lottery, When it is acquired as a random number for lottery, it is determined that each is a win. When 0 to 11523 are acquired as random numbers for internal lottery, all combinations are lost.

  The approximate winning probability of each combination and combination of combinations calculated based on the number of judgment values is the big bonus (1), big bonus (2), regular bonus, big bonus (1) + cherry, big bonus ( 2) + Cherry, Big Bonus (1) +1 (1), Big Bonus (2) +1 (1), Big Bonus (1) +1 (2), Big Bonus (2) +1 (2), Replay , Cherry, 1 (1), 1 (2), bell, 1 / 819.2, 1 / 819.2, 1 / 528.5, 1/1638, 1/1638, 1/3277, 1/3277, 1/3277, 1/3277, 1 / 7.3, 1 / 170.7, 1 / 100.5, 1 / 100.5, and 1 / 7.87.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 6B, when any special combination is carried over in the normal gaming state, only replay, cherry, 1 (1), 1 (2), and bell are inside. Since the number of determination values for each combination is 2245, 96, 163, 163, 2082 at the set value 6, the numbers 14139-16383, 14043-14138, 13880-14042, 13717-13789, 11635 When ˜13716 are acquired as random numbers for internal lottery, each is determined to be a winner. In addition, the approximate winning probabilities of the respective combinations are 1 / 7.3, 1 / 170.7, 1 / 100.5, 1 / 100.5, and 1 / 7.87. When 0-11634 is acquired as a random number for internal lottery, all combinations are lost.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 6C, in the regular bonus, only the cherry, 1 (1), 1 (2), and bell are subject to internal lottery. Since the determination value numbers are 96, 163, 163, and 15919, when 16288 to 16383, 16125 to 16287, 15962 to 16124, and 43 to 15961 are acquired as random numbers for internal lottery, they are determined to be winning. In addition, the approximate winning probabilities for each combination are 1 / 10.70.7, 1 / 100.5, 1 / 100.5, and 1 / 1.03. When 0 to 42 are acquired as random numbers for internal lottery, all combinations are lost.

  In the present embodiment, when any special combination is not carried over in the normal gaming state (state number 1), the internal winning probability (1 / 170.7) of the cherry is any special in the normal gaming state. If the hand is carried over (state number 0), it is lower than the internal winning probability of cherry (in the case of no special part carried over in the normal gaming state, the cherry is a big bonus (1) or big For example, the number of cherry judgment values (96) in state number 1 is the same as the number of cherry judgment values in state number 0 (10 + 10 + 96 = 116), or the state number The number of judgment values at 0 is used as it is (in this case, winning of a role not subject to internal lottery is invalid) The may be the same internal winning probability both cherry when any special role has been the case and carried over are carried over in the normal gaming state.

Next, stop control of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R will be described.
The CPU 41a refers to the table index and table creation data stored in the ROM 41b when the reel starts rotating and when the reel stops and the reel that is still rotating still remains. Create a stop control table for each reel. When any of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R corresponding to the rotating reel is effectively detected, the stop control table of the corresponding reel is referred to, and the referred stop control table is drawn. Based on the number of frames, control is performed to stop the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R corresponding to the operated stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R.

  As shown in FIG. 7, the table index contains table creation data from the reference address (table_index) when referring to the table index, according to the setting state of the winning flag by internal lottery (hereinafter referred to as the internal winning state). Differences up to the address where the index data indicating the head address of the stored area is stored are registered. As a result, a difference corresponding to the internal winning state is acquired, and the corresponding index data can be acquired by adding the difference to the reference address (table_index).

  Specifically, Loss, Cherry, 1 (1), 1 (2), Bell, Replay, Big Bonus (1) (+ Loss), Big Bonus (1) + Cherry, Big Bonus (1) + 1 (1), Big Bonus (1) + 1 (2), Big Bonus (1) + Bell, Big Bonus (1) + Replay, Big Bonus (2) (+ Loss), Big Bonus (2) + Cherry, Big Bonus (2) + 1 (1), Big Bonus (2) + 1 (2), Big Bonus (2) + Bell, Big Bonus (2) + Replay, Regular Bonus (+ Loss), Regular Bonus + Cherry, Regular Bonus + 1 (1), Regular Bonus + 1 (2), Regular Bonus + Bell, Regular Bonus + Replay Index data indicating the leading address of the formation data is stored area is stored. Even if the winning status of the combination is different, when the same control is applied (for example, big bonus (1) + replay winning, big bonus (2) + replay winning, regular bonus + replay winning In the case of applying the same control, etc., the same address is stored as index data. In such a case, the stop control table is created by referring to the same table creation data. Will be.

  The table creation data is composed of drawn-in frame number data indicating the number of drawn-in frames corresponding to the stop operation position, and an address of drawn-in frame number data to be referred to in accordance with the reel stop status.

  The number-of-drawing frame data referenced according to the reel stop status is whether all reels are rotating, only the left reel is stopped, only the middle reel is stopped, only the right reel is stopped, or left Depending on whether the middle reel is stopped, the left and right reels are stopped, the middle and right reels are stopped, and in the situation where any one of the reels is stopped, Since it may vary depending on the stop position of the stopped reel, the address of the number of frames to be drawn to be referred to is registered for each rotating reel for each situation, and based on the top address of the table creation data Therefore, it is possible to specify the address of the number of frames data to be referred to according to each situation, and from this identified address, it is necessary to identify the address according to each situation. It has to be able to identify a lead-frame number data. Even if the reel stop status and the stop position of the stopped reel are different, the same address is registered as the address of the number of frames to be drawn when the same number of frames to be drawn is applied. In such a case, the same data for the number of frames to be drawn is referred to.

  The drawn frame number data is data that can specify the number of drawn frames for each timing at which the stop operation is performed. In the present embodiment, stepping motors that make one turn at a cycle of 168 steps (0 to 167) are used for the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R. That is, when the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R are driven for 168 steps, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R make one round. As shown in FIG. 8, 21 areas (frames) divided into 8 steps (the number of steps in which one symbol moves) are defined for one rotation of the reel. Area numbers 1 to 21 from the position are assigned. On the other hand, the number of symbols arranged on one reel is 21, and symbol numbers 1 to 21 from the reel reference position are assigned to symbols on each reel, so symbols 1 to 21 are assigned to symbols. , Area numbers 1 to 21 are assigned in order. The number of drawn frames by area number is compressed and stored according to a predetermined rule, and the number of drawn frames by area number can be acquired by expanding the number of drawn frame data. It has become.

  As described above, the stop control table created by referring to the table index and the table creation data, as shown in FIG. In the embodiment, the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is performed at the timing (the timing at which the number of steps from the reel reference position is included in the range of the number of steps of each region number) located in the lower symbol area of the fluoroscopic window 3. This is a table in which the number of frames to be drawn in is detected.

  Next, the procedure for creating the stop control table will be described. First, at the start of reel rotation, the top address of the table creation data corresponding to the internal winning state of the game is acquired. Specifically, the table index is first referred to, index data corresponding to the internal winning state is obtained, table creation data is identified based on the obtained index data, and all reels are identified from the identified table creation data. Acquires the address of the data for the number of drawn frames corresponding to each reel corresponding to the rotating state of the reel, and develops the data for the number of drawn frames for each reel stored at the acquired address to create a stop control table for all the reels. .

  Further, when any one reel stops or any two reels stop, the index data acquired at the start of reel rotation, that is, the top address of the table creation data corresponding to the internal winning state of the game The table creation data is identified based on the obtained table creation data, and the address of the stopped reel and the number of pull-in frame data of the unstopped reel corresponding to the area number of the stop position of the reel is obtained. The number-of-drawing frame number data stored in each reel is expanded to create a stop control table for unstopped reels.

  Next, when the CPU 41a effectively detects any one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R corresponding to the rotating reel, the control for deriving the display result to the corresponding reel will be described. If any of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R corresponding to the rotating reel is detected effectively, the area number of the stop operation position is based on the number of steps from the reel reference position when the stop operation is detected. And the number of drawn frames corresponding to the area number of the specified stop operation position is acquired by referring to the stop control table of the reel where the stop operation is detected. Then, control is performed to rotate and stop the reel by the number of acquired frames. Specifically, from the number of steps from the reel reference position at the time when the stop operation is detected, the number of steps from the acquired number of drawn frames until it is stopped is calculated, and the reel is rotated and stopped by the calculated number of steps. Take control. As a result, an area (stop point in the figure) corresponding to the area number corresponding to the stop position ahead of the number of frames to be drawn in from the area (stop operation point in the figure) corresponding to the area number of the stop operation position where the stop operation is detected. It stops at the stop reference position (in this embodiment, the lower symbol area of the fluoroscopic window 3).

  Further, only one address is stored in the table index of the present embodiment as index data corresponding to one internal winning state in one gaming state. Furthermore, one table creation data includes one address. Only one address is stored as the address of the storage area for the number of drawn frame data corresponding to the stop status of the reel (and the stop position of the stopped reel). In other words, table creation data corresponding to one internal winning state in one gaming state, and number-of-drawing frame number data corresponding to the stop status of the reel (and the stop position of the stopped reel) are uniquely determined, The stop control table created with reference to these is also unique for one internal winning state in one gaming state and the reel stop status (and the stop position of the stopped reel). Therefore, when all of the gaming state, the internal winning state, and the reel stop status (and the stop position of the stopped reel) are the same, the reel is based on the same stop control table, that is, the same control pattern. The stop control is performed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a value of 0 to 4 is determined as the number of drawn frames, and the reel can be stopped by drawing a maximum of four frame symbols after detecting a stop operation. In other words, the stop position of the symbol can be designated from a range of a maximum of 5 frames including the stop operation position where the stop operation is detected. In addition, since it is necessary to move one frame to move the reel for one symbol, it is possible to stop the reel by pulling in a maximum of four symbols after detecting the stop operation. The symbol stop position can be designated from a range of up to five symbols including the operation position.

  Also, in the table index, the number of frames to be drawn in to the address corresponding to the case where one of the winning combinations is won, with the winning combination being drawn to the maximum within the range of 4 frames, so that the winning combination is not aligned For creating a table with the number of frames to be drawn in, so that the index data for identifying the table creation data for which is defined is stored, and the address corresponding to the case where the winning is lost is not included in any role Stores index data for specifying data. Therefore, if any winning combination is won, there will be a stop control table in which the winning combination is drawn to the maximum in the range of 4 frames and the number of drawing frames to be drawn is set so that the winning combination is not aligned. The reel stop control is performed, and if no winning combination is selected, a stop control table in which the number of frames to be drawn in which no winning combination is determined is created, and the reel stop control is performed. Done. As a result, when the stop operation is performed, if the symbols of the winning combination can be stopped on the winning line in the drawing range of a maximum of 4 frames, the control is performed to align and stop the winning combination. The symbol of the winning combination is controlled to be stopped in a drawing range of up to 4 frames.

  Also, in the table index, the address corresponding to the case where a small role is elected with a special role carried over from before the previous game (Big Bonus (1) + Cherry, Big Bonus (1) + Bell, etc.) The number of frames to be drawn is determined so that the selected special role can be drawn to the maximum in the range of 4 frames, and the stoppage position where the selected special role cannot be drawn in the range of up to 4 frames is selected. The index data for specifying the data for creating the table in which the number of frames to be drawn is determined so that the number of frames is drawn to the maximum within the range of 4 frames is stored, and the reel stop control is performed. As a result, when the stop operation is performed, if the symbols of the special roles elected in the winning range of up to 4 frames can be aligned and stopped on the winning line, the control is performed to align and stop them. If you can't draw a special role that you have won in the drawing range of up to 4 frames on the winning line, you can align the symbols of the small role that has been won in the drawing range of up to 4 frames on the winning line. If they can be stopped, control is performed to stop them all together, and the symbol of the winning combination is controlled to be stopped in the drawing range of 4 frames. That is, in such a case, priority is given to the control for aligning the special combination on the winning line over the small combination, and the small combination can be won only when the special combination cannot be drawn.

  Also, in the table index, when a re-playing role is won in a state where the special role has been carried over from before the previous game (Big Bonus (1) + Replay etc.), the re-playing role has 4 frames. Index data for specifying table creation data in which the number of frames to be drawn is determined so as to be pulled in as much as possible within a range is stored, and reel stop control is performed. As a result, when a stop operation is performed, control is performed in which the symbols of the re-gamer are aligned and stopped on the winning line within a drawing range of a maximum of 4 frames. In addition, as will be described later, “replay” which is a symbol constituting the re-gamer is arranged within 5 symbols, that is, within 4 frames, for each of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. Can be stopped at any position within the pull-in range, so if the special player is carried over from before the previous game, the stop switch 8L, 8C, 8R by the player Regardless of the operation timing, the re-game players will always win together. That is, in such a case, the control for aligning the re-games on the winning line has priority over the special game, and the re-games will always win.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 2, “bell” and “replay” are arranged within 5 symbols, that is, within an interval of 4 frames, for all of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. It can be stopped at any position within the range. That is, when the winning flag for the bell and the replay is set, the winning combination can always be won regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R by the player.

  In addition, when the winning flag for replay is set, if the left reel is still rotating, the “Replay” symbol is always used as the stop control table for the middle reel and the right reel. A stop control table for drawing on L2 or L5 is created, and when the “replay” symbol is stopped on at least one winning line L2 or L5 for the middle reel or the right reel, the stop control table for the left reel is 5 The “replay” symbol of the number, that is, when the symbol is stopped on the winning line L2 or L5, the “replay” symbol excluding the “replay” symbol that also stops the “cherry” on the winning line L1, is a drawing range of 4 frames. A stop control table is created that pulls on the winning line L2 or L5, and the middle reel or right reel is called the left reel. In the case of stopping first, the “replay” symbol is drawn on the winning line L2 or L5, and when the left reel is stopped thereafter, the “replay” other than No. 5 on the winning line L2 or L5 is always set. Since the control for drawing the symbols is performed, for example, when the “replay” symbol No. 5 on the winning line L2 or L5 of the middle reel and the right reel is stopped, the replay and the cherry are not won simultaneously. In the left reel, the “Replay” symbol of No. 2 and the “Replay” symbol of No. 7 are arranged within 4 frames, so even if control is performed to avoid the “Replay” symbol of No. 5, Regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R by the player, the replay can always be won. If the replay winning flag is set and the left reel is stopped while all reels are still rotating, except for the case where the replay and cherry win at the same time, A stop control table for drawing the “replay” symbol into any of the pay lines L1 to L5 within the drawing range of 4 frames is created. That is, when the left reel is first stopped, control is performed so that the combination of “replay” can be arranged in any of the winning lines L1 to L5.

  In addition, when the winning flag for the bell is set, if the left reel is still rotating, the “bell” symbol is always used as the stop control table for the middle reel and the right reel. A stop control table is drawn in on L1, and when the “bell” symbol is stopped on at least one winning line L1 of the middle reel or the right reel, the “bell” symbol is used as the stop control table for the left reel. A stop control table for drawing on the winning line L1 in the drawing range of 4 frames is created, and when the middle reel or the right reel is stopped before the left reel, the “bell” symbol is drawn on the winning line L1, Thereafter, when the left reel is stopped, the “bell” symbol is always drawn on the winning line L1. In the left reel, the “bell” symbol and the “cherry” symbol are not arranged continuously. For this reason, the bell can always be won regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R by the player, and the bell and the cherry are not simultaneously won. If the left reel is stopped while all the reels are still rotating when the bell winning flag is set, except for the case where the bell and cherry win at the same time, A stop control table for drawing the “bell” symbol into any of the pay lines L1 to L5 within the drawing range of 4 frames is created. That is, when the left reel is stopped for the first time, control is performed so that the combination of “bells” can be arranged in any of the winning lines L1 to L5.

  Next, chance eyes and reach eyes will be described. The chance chance in the present embodiment is a display mode that can be derived when any bonus is won in the normal gaming state, or when one (1), one (2) is won. Yes, in this embodiment, as the display result of the left reel, the “replay watermelon bell” of the 2nd to 4th symbols or the “bell / red 7 • bell” of the 8th to 10th symbols, the 15th to 17th symbols “Replay / Blue 7 / Watermelon” is stopped and all the roles are not aligned on the winning line. As a result of displaying the middle reel, “Cherry Replay Cherry”, 21, 1 No. 2 pattern “Cherry Bell Cherry” stops, no display is in line on winning line, right reel display result is “Replay Cherry Blue 7” Will stop, It has applied the display mode role of the shift also not aligned on a winning line as a chance eyes.

  The reach eye is a display mode that can be derived only when any bonus (big bonus (1), big bonus (2), regular bonus) is won in the normal gaming state. Then, as the display result of the left reel, the display mode in which “blue 7 / watermelon / blue 7” of symbols 16 to 18 is stopped is the reach of all bonuses, and symbols 20, 20, 1 or 12 to 14 The display pattern in which the “Replay Watermelon Bell” symbol is stopped and none of the roles are on the winning line is applied as the reach of the big bonus (1) or regular bonus.

  In the present embodiment, each of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R is selected when one of the bonuses is won in the normal gaming state, or when one (1), one (2) is won. Regardless of the order in which the stop operations are performed, control is made so that chances can be derived, and when any bonus is won in the normal gaming state, the stop operation of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R Regardless of the order in which the reels are performed, the reach is controlled so that it can be derived, but the stop operation of each reel is performed in the order that satisfies a specific condition (for example, left, middle, right). You may make it possible to derive a chance or reach according to the conditions.

  Here, an example of reel stop control when the chance eyes and reach eyes are derived will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 8 shows a case where no combination is won in the normal gaming state (losing), and one piece (1) is won without any bonus being carried over (1 piece (1)). If none of the bonuses have been carried over and 1 (2) has been won (1 (2)), if no bonus has been carried over and the cherry has been won (Cherry), If the Big Bonus (1) or Regular Bonus is won and no other character is selected (BB (1) RB), the Big Bonus (2) is selected and no other character is selected It is a figure which shows the stop control table of the left reel produced in the case (BB (2)).

  First, in a case where no combination is won in the normal gaming state (losing), a stop control table corresponding to the item of losing in FIG. 8 is created as a stop control table for the left reel. In this stop control table, “replay watermelon bell” of symbols 2 to 4 for all area numbers, “bell / red 7 bell” of symbols 8 to 10 and “ "Replay Blue 7 Watermelon", 12-14 design "Replay Watermelon Bell", 16-18 design "Blue 7 Watermelon Blue 7", 20, 21, 1 design "Replay The number of frames to be drawn in which a display result other than “watermelon bell” is specified is determined, and 2 to 4 are display results that constitute a chance eye when a stop operation of the left reel is detected at any timing. In the display results that comprise the "Replay Watermelon Bell" of the number 8 symbol, the "Bell Red 7 Bell" of the 8th to 10th symbol, and the "Replay Blue 7 Watermelon" of the 15th to 17th symbol There is a 12-14 pattern "Replay Watermelon Bell" No. 6-18 symbols “Blue 7 / Watermelon / Blue 7”, 20, 21, No. 1 symbol “Replay / Watermelon / Bell” will not be derived as a display result and will eventually be a chance or reach Does not hold.

  When one (1) is won in a state where no bonuses are carried over in the normal gaming state (1 (1)), the one shown in FIG. The stop control table corresponding to the item of) is created. In this stop control table, the display results are displayed in which “blue 7” constituting one (1) combination stops on any winning line for the area numbers 1 to 3 and 16 to 21. The number of drawn frames is determined. In particular, for the region numbers 18 and 19, the number of drawn frames for specifying “Replay / Blue 7 / Watermelon” of symbols 15 to 17 is determined. In addition, “Replay Watermelon Bell” of symbols 2 to 4 is specified for the region numbers 4 to 8, and “Bell Red 7 Bell” of the symbols 8 to 10 is specified for the region numbers 10 to 14. The number of drawn frames is determined, and the number of drawn frames for specifying a display result other than the display result including the display mode that configures the chance and reach for other area numbers is determined.

  Therefore, the timings of the area numbers 1 to 3 and 16 to 21, that is, the “blue 7” symbols constituting the combination of one (1) can be drawn in a range of a maximum of 4 frames and stopped on any winning line. When a stop operation of the left reel is detected at a possible timing, a display result in which the “blue 7” symbols constituting one (1) combination stop on any winning line is derived. In particular, when the stop operation of the left reel is detected at the timing of the area numbers 18 and 19 among the timing at which the “Blue 7” symbol can be drawn in the range of up to 4 frames and stopped on any of the pay lines The 15th to 17th symbols “Replay / Blue 7 / Watermelon” are derived, and if one (1) combination is not completed on the winning line, other winning combinations will be aligned on the winning line. Since there is nothing, chances will be established. Also, when the left reel stop operation is detected at the timings of the region numbers 4 to 8 among the timings at which the “blue 7” symbol cannot be drawn in the range of a maximum of 4 frames and stopped on the winning line, When “replay watermelon bell” of symbols 2 to 4 is derived as a display result, and a stop operation of the left reel is detected at the timing of area numbers 10 to 14, “bell bell” of symbols 8 to 10 is detected. “Red 7 Bell” is derived as the display result, and in these cases, the winning combination is not finally arranged on the winning line, and therefore, a chance chance is established. In addition, even if a stop operation of the left reel is detected at any other timing, the display mode constituting the chance eyes and reach eyes is not derived as the display result, and the chance eyes and reach eyes are finally obtained. Is not true.

  In addition, among the display results constituting these chance eyes, a stop operation is detected at a timing at which the “Blue 7” symbol cannot be stopped on the winning line, that is, at a timing at which one (1) cannot be won. Stop operation position (area number) in which the number of pull-in frames specifying “Replay / Watermelon / Bell” of the 2nd to 4th symbols and “Bell / Red 7 / Bell” of the 8th to 10th symbols is determined. Is larger than the number of stop operation positions (area numbers) in which the number of drawn-in frames for which the display result of “Blue 7” stopping on any pay line is specified is 1 in the normal gaming state. In the case where only the sheet (1) has been won, a higher rate than the display result that “blue 7” constituting the combination of one sheet (1) stops on any winning line is derived, Configure chance eyes Among the displayed results, the “Replay Watermelon Bell” of No. 2-4 and the “No. 8” of “No. 8” are derived when a stop operation is detected at a timing when one (1) cannot be won. "Bell / Red 7 / Bell" will be derived.

  When one (2) is won (1 (2)) in a state where no bonus has been carried over in the normal gaming state, the one shown in FIG. 8 (2) is used as the stop control table for the left reel. The stop control table corresponding to the item of) is created. In this stop control table, for the region numbers 9 to 15, “red 7” that constitutes a combination of one (2) has the number of drawn frames for specifying the display result that stops on any pay line. In particular, for the area numbers 12 and 13, the number of frames to be drawn in which “Bell, Red 7 and Bell” of the 8th to 10th symbols are specified is determined. In addition, “Replay / Watermelon Bell” of symbols 2 to 4 is specified for the region numbers 6 to 8, and “Replay / Blue 7 / Watermelon” of the symbols 15 to 17 is specified for the region numbers 17 to 21. The number of drawn-in frames is determined, and the number of drawn-in frames in which display results other than the display result including the display mode that constitutes the chance and reach eyes for other area numbers are specified.

  Therefore, the timing of the area numbers 9 to 15, that is, the timing at which the “red 7” symbol constituting the combination of one (2) can be drawn in a range of a maximum of 4 frames and stopped on any winning line. When the stop operation of the left reel is detected, a display result in which the “red 7” symbols constituting the combination of one (2) stop on any winning line is derived. In particular, when a stop operation of the left reel is detected at the timing of area numbers 12 and 13 among the timing at which the “red 7” symbol can be drawn in a range of up to 4 frames and stopped on any of the pay lines The 8th to 10th symbols “Bell / Red 7 / Bell” are derived, and if one (2) combination is not completed on the winning line, other winning combinations will be aligned on the winning line. Since there is nothing, chances will be established. Also, when the left reel stop operation is detected at the timing of the area numbers 6 to 8 among the timings at which the “red 7” symbol cannot be drawn in the range of up to 4 frames and stopped on the winning line, When the “replay watermelon bell” of symbols 2 to 4 is derived as a display result and the stop operation of the left reel is detected at the timing of area numbers 17 to 21, “replay “Blue 7 / Watermelon” is derived as the display result, and in these cases, the winning combination is not finally arranged on the winning line, and therefore, a chance chance is established. In addition, even if a stop operation of the left reel is detected at any other timing, the display mode constituting the chance eyes and reach eyes is not derived as the display result, and the chance eyes and reach eyes are finally obtained. Is not true.

  In addition, among the display results constituting these chance eyes, a stop operation is detected at a timing at which the “red 7” symbol cannot be stopped on the winning line, that is, at a timing at which one (2) cannot be won. Stop operation position (area number) in which the number of frames to be drawn specifying the “Replay / Watermelon Bell” of the 2nd to 4th symbols and the “Replay / Blue 7 / Watermelon” of the 15th to 17th symbols is determined. Is larger than the number of stop operation positions (area numbers) in which the number of draw-in frames for which the display result of “Red 7” stopping on any winning line is specified is 1 in the normal gaming state. In the case where only the sheet (2) is won, a higher rate than the display result in which “red 7” constituting the combination of the sheet (2) stops on any winning line is derived, Chance eyes “Replay Watermelon Bell” and Nos. 15-17 are derived when the stop operation is detected at a timing at which one (2) cannot be won out of the displayed display results. "Replay Blue 7 Watermelon" will be derived.

  When the big bonus (1) or the regular bonus is won in the normal gaming state and any other combination is not won, the stop control table for the left reel is set in the item BB (1) RB in FIG. A corresponding stop control table is created. In the stop control table, the number of frames to be drawn in which the “replay watermelon bell” of the 2nd to 4th symbols is specified for the area numbers 6 to 8 is determined. Number of drawing frames in which “Bell / Red 7 / Bell” of the design symbol is specified is determined, and for the area number 17, 20, 21, the number of drawing frames in which “Replay Watermelon Bell” of the design is specified The number of frames to be drawn that specifies the “replay watermelon bell” of the 12th to 14th symbols for the area number 16 is determined, and the “replay / blue” of the 15th to 17th symbols for the area number 17 “7. Watermelon” is specified, and the number of drawn frames is specified for area numbers 18 and 19, and “Blue 7, Watermelon, Blue 7” is specified for symbols 16-18. For other area numbers. Number pull frames are determined eye display result other than the display results and a display mode which constitutes a is specified.

  Therefore, when the stop operation of the left reel is detected at the timing of the area numbers 6 to 8, the “replay watermelon bell” of the symbols 2 to 4 is derived as the display result, and finally on the winning line Since there will be no winning combination, a chance will be established. When the stop operation of the left reel is detected at the timing of the area numbers 12 and 13, the symbols “Bell / Red 7 / Bell” of the 8th to 10th symbols are derived as the display result, and finally the big on the winning line If the combination of bonus (1) is not complete, no other combination will be lined up on the winning line, so a chance will be established. When the stop operation of the left reel is detected at the timing of the area number 17, “Replay / Blue 7 / Watermelon” of symbols 15 to 17 is derived as a display result, and the winning combination is finally placed on the winning line. Since there is no match, chances will be established.

  In addition, when the stop operation of the left reel is detected at the timing of the area number 16, the “replay watermelon bell” of the symbols 12 to 14 is derived as the display result, and at the timing of the area number 1, the left reel is When a stop operation is detected, “Replay Watermelon Bell” of No. 20, 21, No. 1 is derived as a display result, and in any case, no winning combination is finally arranged on the winning line. Therefore, a reach that can appear only when the big bonus (1) or the regular bonus is won is established, and if a stop operation of the left reel is detected at the timing of the area number 18, 16-18. The symbol “blue 7, watermelon, blue 7” is derived as a display result, and a reach that is common to all bonuses is established.

  When the big bonus (2) is won in the normal gaming state and any other combination is not won, the stop control corresponding to the item of BB (2) in FIG. A table is created. In this stop control table, the number of frames to be drawn in which “Replay / Watermelon Bell” of No. 2-4 is specified for the area numbers 4-7 is determined, and 8-10 for the area numbers 12-14. The number of drawn frames in which “Bell / Red 7 / Bell” of the number symbol is specified is determined, and the number of drawn frames in which “Replay / Blue 7 / Watermelon” of the number 15 to 17 is identified for the area number 17 The number of frames to be drawn in which “Blue 7, Watermelon, Blue 7” of the symbols 16 to 18 is specified for the area numbers 19 to 21 is determined. The number of frames to be drawn in which a display result other than the display result including the display mode constituting the eye is specified is determined.

  Therefore, when the stop operation of the left reel is detected at the timing of the region numbers 4 to 7, the “replay watermelon bell” of the symbols 2 to 4 is derived as the display result, and the region numbers 12 to 14 When the stop operation of the left reel is detected at the timing of, the symbol “Bell / Red 7 / Bell” of the 8th to 10th symbols is derived as the display result, and the winning combination is finally arranged on the winning line. Since there is no chance, a chance will be established. If a stop operation of the left reel is detected at the timing of area number 17, “Replay / Blue 7 / Watermelon” of symbols 15 to 17 is derived as a display result, and finally a big is displayed on the winning line. If the combination of bonus (2) is not complete, no other combination will be aligned on the winning line, and the chance will be established. In addition, when the stop operation of the left reel is detected at the timing of the area numbers 19 to 21, “blue 7 / watermelon / blue 7” of symbols 16 to 18 is derived as a display result and is common to all bonuses. The reach will be established.

  As described above, when any bonus is won in the normal gaming state and any other combination is not won, “Replay Watermelon Bell” of No. 2-4, No. of No. 8-10 A stop control table that can specify “bell / red 7 / bell”, “replay / blue 7 / watermelon” of symbols 15 to 17 as a display result is created as a stop control table for the left reel.

  In addition, when only one (1) is won in the normal gaming state, when a stop operation is performed at a timing at which one (1) cannot be awarded among the display results constituting the chance eye In addition, “Replay Watermelon Bell” of the 2nd to 4th symbols and “Bell / Red 7 / Bell” of the 8th to 10th symbols can be specified as the display result, and the combination of one (1) Stop control table that can specify “Replay / Blue 7 / Watermelon” of symbols 15 to 17 as a display result when a stop operation is performed at a timing at which the “Blue 7” symbol can be stopped on the winning line. Is created as a stop control table for the left reel.

  In addition, when only one (2) is won in the normal gaming state, when a stop operation is performed at a timing at which one (2) cannot be awarded among the display results constituting the chance eye In addition, it is possible to specify “Replay / Watermelon / Bell” of symbols 2 to 4 and “Replay / Blue 7 / Watermelon” of symbols 15 to 17 as display results, and “ A stop control table that can specify “bell, red 7 and bell” of the 8th to 10th symbols as a display result when a stop operation is performed at a timing at which the “red 7” symbol can be stopped on the winning line. Is created as a stop control table for the left reel.

  As a result, when one of the bonuses is won in the normal gaming state and no other combination is won, or when only one (1) is won in the normal gaming state, or in the normal gaming state In this case, when only one winning combination (2) is won, reel stop control is performed based on a stop control table from which chance chances can be derived. In particular, when only one (1) is elected in the normal gaming state, the “Blue 7” symbols constituting the combination of one (1) cannot be stopped on the winning line. It is possible to derive “Replay Watermelon Bell” of the symbols and “Bell / Red 7 / Bell” of the symbols 8 to 10 as the display results, and “Blue 7” constituting a combination of one (1). When the symbol can be stopped on the winning line, it is possible to derive “Replay / Blue 7 / Watermelon” of No. 15 to 17 as the display result, and only one (2) in the normal gaming state. When winning, if the “Red 7” symbols that make up the combination of two (2) cannot be stopped on the winning line, the “Replay Watermelon Bell”, 15-4 symbols, No. 17 “Replay ・"7. Watermelon" can be derived as the display result, and when the "Red 7" symbol that constitutes the combination of two sheets (2) can be stopped on the winning line, It is possible to derive “bell / red 7 / bell” as the display result.

  In addition, when any of the roles is not won in the normal gaming state, the “replay watermelon bell” of the 2nd to 4th symbols constituting the chance eye, the “bell / red 7 • bell” of the 8th to 10th symbols A stop control table that can specify display results other than “Replay / Blue 7 / Watermelon” of symbols 15 to 17 is created as a stop control table for the left reel. Thus, when any combination is not won in the normal gaming state, the reel stop control is performed based on the stop control table that does not derive the chance.

  Also, if any bonus is won in the normal gaming state and any other combination is not won, only one (1) is won in the normal gaming state, and in the normal gaming state In the case where only one (2) is elected, “Replay Watermelon” of the 2nd to 4th symbols constituting the chance chance when the stop operation is detected at the timing of the area numbers 6, 7, 12 and 13・ "Bell" or 8-10 symbols "Bell / Red 7 / Bell" are derived as display results, but if no role is won in the normal gaming state (losing), the area number 6, Even if a stop operation is detected at any of timings 7, 12, and 13, "Replay / Watermelon Bell" of symbols 2 to 4 or "Bell / Red 7 / Bell" of symbols 8 to 10 are displayed as display results. Derived Rukoto is not. In other words, when the bonus or one (1) or one (2) is won, the display result constituting the chance eye is derived by performing the operation of stopping the left reel at the timing described above. On the other hand, if no winning combination is won, even if the left reel is stopped at the same timing, the display result constituting the chance eye is not derived.

  At the start of reel rotation, the above-described stop control table corresponding to the internal winning state is created as a stop control table for the left reel, and any one of the middle reel and the right reel is stopped. Even if both the middle reel and the right reel are stopped, if the symbols that make up the winning combination are on the winning line, or if a non-winning character wins The above-described stop control table corresponding to the internal winning state is created as a left reel stop control table, except in the case where there is a possibility of the occurrence of a failure. That is, when the left reel is stopped first, or when it is stopped second or third, the combination of symbols that make up the winning bonus is on the winning line of the already stopped reel Or, unless there is a possibility that a winning combination will win from the display result of a reel that has already been stopped, whether 1 (1) or 1 (2) will be won in the normal gaming state, If any bonus is won, the reel stop control is performed based on the stop control table from which the chance can be derived. If no combination is won, the chance is not derived. The reel stop control is performed based on the stop control table.

  In addition, for the middle reel and the right reel, stop control that can derive a chance when one (1) or one (2) is won in the normal gaming state or one of the bonuses is won. Stop control is performed based on the table.

  Next, the symbol arrangement will be described with reference to FIG. 2. The 9th “red 7” symbol constituting the combination of the big bonus (1) and the regular bonus, 1 (2) in the left reel is the upper stage of the left reel, Display modes (area numbers 7-9, 8-10, 9-11) that stop at either the middle or lower level, the combination of the big bonus (2) and the number 16 and 18 constituting the combination of one (1) The display mode (region numbers 14-16, 15-17, 16-18, 17-19, 18-20) in which the “Blue 7” symbol of the number stops at any of the upper, middle, and lower stages of the left reel Each is arranged beyond the maximum pull-in range of 4 frames.

  For this reason, when a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position (region numbers 9 to 13) at which the 9th “red 7” symbol can be drawn on a maximum of 4 frames and stopped on any winning line, You can draw the 16th “Blue 7” symbol up to 4 frames and stop it on any winning line, or you can draw the 18th “Blue 7” symbol up to 4 frames and stop it on any winning line. When a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position (region numbers 1 to 3 and 16 to 21) that can be played, the “red 7” symbol of No. 9 is drawn up to 4 frames and stopped on any winning line I can't do that either. In other words, the “Blue 7” symbol does not stop on the winning line regardless of the timing at which the “Red 7” symbol can be drawn on the winning line, and the “Blue 7” symbol does not stop on the winning line. Big red (1), regular bonus (1), 1 piece (in the position where the red 7 symbol does not stop on the winning line no matter what timing the stop operation is made Since the “red 7” symbol constituting the combination of 2) and the “blue 7” symbol constituting the combination of the big bonus (2) and one (1) are arranged respectively, the “red 7” symbol is arranged. "There is no stop operation position that can aim at the" blue 7 "symbol at the same time.

  In other words, in the left reel stop control table created when the big bonus (2) or one (1) is won in the normal gaming state, the “Blue 7” symbol stops on any winning line. Created when the area numbers 1 to 3 and 16 to 21 in which the number of display frames to be drawn are determined and the big bonus (1) or regular bonus, 1 (2) are won in the normal gaming state. In the stop control table for the left reel, the “Red 7” symbol is different from the region numbers 9 to 15 in which the number of frames for drawing the display mode in which the “Red 7” symbol stops on any winning line is different. There is no stop operation position at which the “blue 7” symbol can be aimed at the same time.

  In the middle reel and the right reel, a display mode in which the “red 7” symbols constituting the big bonus (1) stop at any one of the upper, middle, and lower stages of the left reel, and the big bonus (2). Since the “Blue 7” symbol is placed in the upper, middle or lower part of the left reel, and the display mode exceeds 4 frames, which is the maximum pull-in range, the “Red 7” symbol is 4 frames at maximum. If a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position that can be pulled in and stopped on any winning line, the “Blue 7” symbol may be drawn up to a maximum of four frames and stopped on any winning line. When a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position where a maximum of 4 frames of “Blue 7” symbol can be drawn and stopped on any winning line, a maximum of 4 frames of “Red 7” symbol can be pulled The It is stopped on the prize line also, so that can not be. That is, in the middle reel and the right reel, the “blue 7” symbol does not stop on the winning line regardless of the timing at which the “red 7” symbol can be drawn on the winning line. A big bonus (1) is formed at a position where the “Red 7” symbol does not stop on the winning line regardless of the timing at which the “Blue 7” symbol can be drawn on the winning line. Since the “Red 7” symbol and the “Blue 7” symbol constituting the big bonus (2) are respectively arranged, there is no stop operation position for simultaneously targeting the “Red 7” symbol and the “Blue 7” symbol. It will be.

  In other words, in the stop control table for the middle reel and the right reel created when the big bonus (2) is won in the normal gaming state, the display mode in which the “blue 7” symbol stops on any winning line "Red 7" symbol is displayed in the area number in which the number of frames to be drawn is defined and the stop control table for the middle reel and the right reel created when the big bonus (1) is won in the normal gaming state Therefore, there is no stop operation position at which the “red 7” symbol and the “blue 7” symbol can be aimed at the same time.

  In the left reel, the 6th “cherry” symbol that constitutes a combination of cherries that pays more medals than one (1) in the normal gaming state stops at either the upper, middle, or lower level of the left reel. Display styles (area numbers 4-6, 5-7, 6-8) and the 16th or 18th “blue 7” symbols constituting the combination of one (1) are the upper, middle, and lower tiers of the left reel The display modes (region numbers 14-16, 15-17, 16-18, 17-19, 18-20) that stop in any of the above are arranged over four frames that are the maximum drawing range.

  For this reason, as shown in FIG. 8, a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position (region numbers 6 to 12) at which a maximum of 4 frames of “No. 6” cherry can be drawn and stopped on any winning line. If this is done, you can pull in the 16th or 18th “Blue 7” design up to 4 frames and stop it on one of the winning lines, or the 16th or 18th “Blue 7” design up to 4 frames. When a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position (area numbers 1 to 3 and 16 to 21) that can be pulled in and stopped on any of the winning lines, a maximum of 4 frames of the “Cherry” symbol is displayed. It cannot be pulled in and stopped on any winning line. In other words, the “Blue 7” symbol does not stop on the winning line regardless of the timing at which the “Cherry” symbol can be drawn on the winning line, and the “Blue 7” symbol does not stop on the winning line. In the normal gaming state, more medals are paid out to a position where the “Cherry” symbol does not stop on the winning line no matter what timing within the range that can be drawn into Since the “Cherry” symbol No. 6 constituting the cherry combination and the “Blue 7” symbol constituting the combination of one (1) are arranged, the “Cherry” symbol and the “Blue 7” symbol are arranged respectively. There is no stop operation position that can aim at the same time.

  In other words, in the stop control table for the left reel created when the cherry is won in the normal gaming state, the number of frames for drawing the display mode in which the “cherry” symbol stops on one of the winning lines is determined. In the stop control table of the left reel created when the area numbers 6 to 12 and one (1) is won in the normal gaming state, a display indicating that the “blue 7” symbol stops on any winning line Since the region numbers 1 to 3 and 16 to 21 in which the number of frames into which the mode is drawn are different are different, there is no stop operation position where the “cherry” symbol and the “blue 7” symbol can be aimed at the same time.

  On the other hand, the display pattern (area number 4-6, 5-7, 6-8) and chance chance that the 6th “cherry” symbol stops at the upper, middle or lower level of the left reel The “Replay Watermelon Bell” of the 2nd to 4th symbols and the “Bell / Red 7 / Bell” of the 8th to 10th symbols are arranged within the maximum drawing range of 4 frames. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 8, a stop operation position (region numbers 6 to 12) in which the number of draw-in frames for drawing the 6th “cherry” symbol up to 4 frames and stopping it on any winning line is determined, and The number of draws to stop the “Replay Watermelon Bell” of the 2-4th symbol and the “Bell / Red 7 / Bell” of the 8th-10th symbols, which constitutes the chance at the time of winning one (1), is determined. Since the stop operation positions (region numbers 4 to 8 and region numbers 10 to 14) partially overlap, the stop operation positions (region numbers 6 to 8 and region numbers 10 to 12) are stopped. If an operation is made, if the cherries are won, the 6th “cherry” symbol will stop on one of the winning lines, and if one is won (1), the chance will be configured "Replay watermelon bell" of No. 2-4, 8 ~ "Bell red 7 Bell" of the No. 0 pattern is to be stopped.

  Next, error control associated with medal payout will be described. The CPU 41a performs control for driving out the hopper motor 34 and paying out medals in accordance with the occurrence of the small role winning and the settlement of credits (including medals used for setting the number of bets). At this time, if medals are continuously detected by the payout sensor 35 for a predetermined time or more, it is determined that the medals are clogged, the drive of the hopper motor 34 is stopped, and the progress of the game is stopped by controlling to an error state. If a medal is not detected by the payout sensor 35 for a certain period of time despite the hopper motor 34 being driven, the hopper motor 34 is stopped once and the hopper motor 34 is restarted several times. If no medal is detected by the payout sensor 35 even after the trial, it is determined as a hopper error (error indicating a lack of medals in the hopper), and the progress of the game is stopped by controlling to an error state. The error states associated with these medal jamming errors and hopper errors are canceled by operating the reset switch 23 and the reset / setting switch 38, and control for paying out the remaining medals is performed.

Next, the abnormal winning determination in the present embodiment will be described.
When all the reels are stopped and the CPU 41a has any winning combination on the winning line, the CPU 41a determines whether the winning combination is an allowable winning combination in the game. Make a decision. When a combination that is not permitted in the game is arranged on the winning line, the game is controlled to an abnormal winning error state to disable the progress of the game. Unlike the other error states, the abnormal winning error state is not canceled even if the reset switch 23 or the reset / setting switch 38 is operated, and a new set value is set in the setting change mode described above. It will not be released until

  The abnormal winning determination will be described. First, the CPU 41a sets an internal winning flag storing work (iwin_flag) assigned to the RAM 41c, and sets an internal winning flag indicating a winning combination permitted in the game after the end of the internal lottery. A winning symbol flag is set to indicate the winning combination on the winning line when the reels stop. Then, an abnormal winning determination flag is created from the internal winning flag, and it is determined whether or not there is an abnormal winning based on the generated abnormal winning determination flag and the winning symbol flag.

  The internal winning flag is a 16-bit (2 byte) binary value indicating a winning combination permitted in the game, and the bit value individually determined for each winning combination is 1. , It indicates that the winning of the combination is permitted, and when it is 0, it indicates that the winning of the combination is not permitted.

  As shown in FIG. 9A, the 0th bit corresponds to the big bonus (1), the 1st bit corresponds to the big bonus (2), the 3rd bit corresponds to the regular bonus, the 6th bit replays, the 12th bit. One bit (1), thirteenth bit corresponds to one (2), fourteenth bit corresponds to bell, and fifteenth bit corresponds to cherry. The third to fifth and seventh to eleventh bits do not correspond to any combination.

  In this embodiment, a plurality of combinations may be permitted in one game. In this case, the value of all the bits corresponding to these combinations is set to 1 in the internal winning flag. It has become.

  The abnormal winning determination flag is a 16-bit (2 byte) binary value indicating a winning combination permitted in the game, but the bit value individually determined for each winning combination is 0. In some cases, it indicates that the winning of the combination is permitted, and in the case of 1, it indicates that the winning of the combination is not permitted. That is, the abnormal winning determination flag is a value obtained by inverting 0 and 1 of the internal winning flag.

  The winning symbol flag is a 16-bit (2 byte) binary value indicating the winning combination on the winning line, and when the value of the bit individually determined for each winning is 1, Indicates that a prize has been won, and if it is 0, it indicates that the role has not won. The winning symbol flag is the same as the internal winning flag. As shown in FIG. 9A, the 0th bit corresponds to the big bonus (1), the 1st bit corresponds to the big bonus (2), and the 3rd bit corresponds to the regular bonus. The sixth bit corresponds to replay, the twelfth bit corresponds to one (1), the thirteenth bit corresponds to one (2), the fourteenth bit corresponds to bell, and the fifteenth bit corresponds to cherry. The third to fifth and seventh to eleventh bits do not correspond to any combination. By comparing the winning symbol flag and the internal winning flag, the CPU 41a performs an abnormal winning determination.

  Then, the CPU 41a determines whether or not an abnormal winning has occurred by performing an AND operation on the abnormal winning determination flag and the winning symbol flag. Of the abnormal winning determination flag, the value of the bit corresponding to the winning combination allowed in the game is 0, and when this winning combination is won, that is, the value of the corresponding bit of the winning symbol flag is 1. However, even if no winning is made, that is, when the value of the corresponding bit of the winning symbol flag is 0, the result of the logical product operation is always 0. On the other hand, of the abnormal winning determination flag, the value of the bit corresponding to the combination that is not allowed in the game is 1, and when this combination does not win, that is, the value of the corresponding bit of the winning symbol flag is 0. In this case, the result of the logical product operation is 0. However, when the prize is won, that is, when the value of the corresponding bit of the winning symbol flag is 1, the result of the logical product operation is 1. For this reason, if even one unacceptable winning combination wins, the result of the logical product operation of the abnormal winning determination flag and the winning symbol flag becomes a value other than 0. In this case, the abnormal winning is determined. Will be.

  FIG. 9B is a diagram showing the flow of processing until the CPU 41a determines an abnormal prize paying attention to the change in the register value.

  As shown in FIG. 9 (a), at the start of processing execution, the upper 8 bits of the internal winning flag are stored in the H register, the lower 8 bits of the internal winning flag are stored in the L register, and the B register. It is assumed that the lower 8 bits of the winning symbol flag are stored in the C register, and the upper 8 bits of the winning symbol flag are stored in the C register.

  As shown in FIG. 9B, first, the lower 8 bits of the internal winning flag stored in the L register are stored in the A register. Further, all bits of the A register are inverted, and a logical product (AND) of the lower 8 bits of the winning symbol flag stored in the B register and the value of the A register is calculated, and the result is stored in the A register. To do. As a result, [all bit inversion value of internal winning flag (lower 8 bits) AND winning symbol flag (lower 8 bits)] is stored in the A register.

  This [all-bit inversion value of internal winning flag (lower 8 bits) AND winning symbol flag (lower 8 bits)] is when the winning specified by the winning symbol is a winning permitted by the internal winning flag [00H], otherwise, it is a value other than [00H] and it is determined that there is an abnormal winning. For example, as shown in FIG. 9B, of the lower 8 bits, the 0th bit of the internal winning flag is 1 {Big Bonus (1) Winning}, and the 0th bit of the winning symbol flag is 1 {Big Bonus (1 ) Winning}, [all bit inversion value of internal winning flag (lower 8 bits) AND winning symbol flag (lower 8 bits)] = [FEH AND 01H] is [00H]. On the other hand, if the 0th bit of the internal winning flag is 1 {Big Bonus (1) Winning} and the second bit of the winning design flag is 1 {Regular Bonus Winning}, all of the [Internal Winning Flag (Lower 8 Bits)] Bit inversion value AND winning symbol flag (lower 8 bits)] = [FEH AND 04H] is 04H, and it is determined that there is an abnormal winning.

  Similarly, by using the H register and the C register, for the upper 8 bits, the [all bit inversion value of the internal winning flag (upper 8 bits) AND winning symbol flag (upper 8 bits)] is calculated and the result is calculated. Store in A register. If the A register is other than [00H], it is determined that the prize is abnormal.

  Next, commands that the CPU 41a of the main control unit 41 transmits to the effect control board 90 will be described.

  In the present embodiment, the CPU 41a of the main control unit 41 gives a BET command, an internal winning command, a reel rotation start command, a reel stop command, a winning determination command, a payout start command, a payout end command, a game to the effect control board 90. A plurality of types of commands including a status command, standby command, abort command, error command, setting start command, and initialization command are transmitted.

  The BET command is a command that can specify the number of medals inserted, that is, the number of medals used to set the bet number. When a medal is inserted, the one-BET switch 5 or the MAX BET switch 6 is operated to set the bet number. Sent when

  The internal winning command is a command that can specify the winning status of the internal winning flag and the type of the internal winning flag that has been established, and is transmitted when the start switch 7 is operated to start the game.

  The reel rotation start command is a command for notifying the start of reel rotation, and is transmitted when rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is started.

  The reel stop command is a command that can specify whether the reel to be stopped is the left reel, the middle reel, or the right reel, the area number of the corresponding reel stop operation position, and the area number of the corresponding reel stop position. And is transmitted every time stop control of each reel is performed.

  The winning determination command is a command that can specify the presence / absence of winning, the type of winning, and the number of medals to be paid out at the time of winning, and is transmitted after all the reels are stopped and the winning determination is performed.

  The payout start command is a command for notifying the start of payout of medals, and is transmitted when the payout of medals is started by payout or credit adjustment (including medals used for setting the number of bets). The payout end command is a command for notifying the end of payout of medals, and is transmitted when the payout of medals by winning and paying out credits is completed.

  The gaming state command is a command that can specify the gaming state of the next game (whether it is a normal gaming state, a big bonus, a regular bonus, etc.), and is transmitted at the end of the game.

  The standby command is a command indicating a transition to the standby state, and is transmitted when the transition to the standby state is made after a certain time has elapsed without setting the bet amount after the end of one game.

  The stop command is a command indicating the occurrence or release of the stop state, and after the end of the BB, the stop command indicating the occurrence of the stop state is transmitted when the ending effect waiting time has elapsed, and the reset operation is performed. When the stop state is released, a stop command indicating the release of the stop state is transmitted.

  An error command is a command that indicates the occurrence or release of an error state. When an error is determined and controlled to the error state, an error command that indicates the occurrence of the error state is sent, and a reset operation is performed to release the error state. At that time, an error command indicating the cancellation of the error state is transmitted.

  The setting start command is a command indicating the start of the setting change mode, and is transmitted when the setting is started, that is, when the mode is changed to the setting change mode.

  The initialization command is a command indicating that the gaming state has been initialized, and is transmitted when the setting ends, that is, when the setting change mode ends.

  Each of these commands is generated in an activation process and a game process described later, temporarily stored in a command queue provided in a special work in the RAM 41c, and transmitted in the timer interrupt process (main) described above.

  Next, the control of the effect performed by the sub control unit 91 based on a command transmitted from the CPU 41a of the main control unit 41 to the effect control board 90 will be described.

  When the CPU 91a of the sub control unit 91 receives a command transmitted by the CPU 41a of the main control unit 41, the CPU 91a refers to the control pattern table stored in the ROM 91b, and displays the liquid crystal display based on the control content registered in the control pattern table. Various effect devices such as the device 51, the effect LED 52, the speakers 53 and 54, and the reel LED 55 are controlled.

  In the control pattern table, the display pattern of the liquid crystal display 51 corresponding to the type of command, the lighting mode of the lighting effect LED 52, the output mode of the speakers 53 and 54, the lighting mode of the reel LED, etc. The control patterns of these effect devices are registered, and when the CPU 91a receives a command, the CPU 91a receives among the control patterns registered corresponding to the effect patterns set in the RAM 91c in the game of the control pattern table. The control device corresponding to the type of the command is referred to, and the rendering device is controlled based on the control pattern. Thereby, the production according to the production pattern and the progress of the game is executed.

  If the CPU 91a receives a new command during the execution of an effect triggered by the reception of a certain command, the CPU 91a stops the effect based on the control pattern being executed, and performs control corresponding to the newly received command. An effect based on the pattern is executed. In other words, even when the effect has not been completed to the end, when a new command is received, the effect that has been executed is canceled and the effect based on the new command is executed.

  When the internal winning command is received, the effect pattern is selected at a selection rate corresponding to the result of the internal lottery indicated by the internal winning command, and is set in the RAM 91c. The selection rate of the effect pattern is registered in the effect table stored in the ROM 91b. When the CPU 91a receives the internal winning command, the CPU 91a is registered in the effect table according to the result of the internal lottery indicated by the internal winning command. The selected selection pattern is selected from a plurality of types of production patterns according to the selection rate, and the selected production pattern is set in the RAM 91c as the production pattern of the game.

  The control pattern table also includes specific commands (reel stop command indicating automatic stop, winning determination command indicating occurrence of winning, payout start command, payout end, gaming state command indicating big bonus end, standby command, stop Command, error command, setting start command, initialization command, etc.) are stored, and the CPU 91a is set in the game when receiving these specific commands. Regardless of the effect pattern being performed, a specific control pattern corresponding to the command is referred to, and the effect device is controlled based on the control pattern.

  When a winning determination command indicating the occurrence of a winning is received, a winning effect pattern for executing a winning effect according to the type of winning is referred to as a control pattern. In particular, when a winning determination command indicating the occurrence of a big bonus winning is received, a BB winning pattern for executing a BB winning effect peculiar to the big bonus winning is referred to as a control pattern.

  When a payout start command is received, a payout pattern for outputting payout sound effects is referred to as a control pattern. If a payout end command is received during the output of the payout sound effect, the output of the payout sound effect is stopped. Note that when a payout start command is received, unlike the other commands, the effect being executed is not executed and the effect corresponding to the received command is not executed. Sound effects are output. That is, the other effects and the effects accompanying the payout are executed in parallel.

  When a gaming state command indicating the end of the big bonus is received, an ending pattern for executing an ending effect indicating the end of the big bonus is referred to as a control pattern.

  When a standby command is received, a standby pattern for executing a standby effect is referred to as a control pattern.

  When a stop command indicating the occurrence of a stop state is received, a stop notification pattern for notifying that the stop state is in effect is referred to as a control pattern. When a stop command indicating release of the stop state is received, the above-described standby pattern is referred to as a control pattern. That is, when the stop state is released, the standby effect is executed.

  When an error command indicating the occurrence of an error state is received, an error notification pattern for notifying the fact of the error state and its type is referred to as a control pattern. When an error command indicating the cancellation of the error state is received, the control pattern that was being executed when the error occurred is referred to. That is, the production at the time of error occurrence is executed from the beginning. In addition, as will be described later, the above-mentioned BB winning effect and ending effect are the progress stage where the effect is dynamically executed, and the state (for example, the final screen on the liquid crystal display 51) when the progress stage ends. Is displayed, and the final stage sound effect is repeatedly output), and the BB winning effect and ending effect reach the final stage when an error occurs. In such a case, when the error is canceled, the BB winning effect and the ending effect are not executed from the elapsed stage, but return to the final stage.

  When the setting start command is received, a setting notification pattern for notifying that the setting is being changed is referred to. When the initialization command is received, the standby pattern described above is referred to as the control pattern. That is, when the initialization command is received, the standby effect is executed.

  The CPU 91a of the sub control unit 91 performs RAM parity adjustment so that the RAM parity based on the data stored in all areas of the RAM 91c becomes 0 each time the timer interrupt process (sub) that is periodically executed is executed. Data is calculated and stored in the RAM 91c.

  Then, the CPU 91a calculates the RAM parity based on the data stored in all the areas of the RAM 91c at the time of activation, and is based on the data stored in the RAM 91c on the condition that the RAM parity is 0. It is designed to return to the production state before the interruption. Specifically, the control pattern executed last is referred to and control based on the control pattern is executed. As a result, an effect based on the control pattern executed before power interruption is executed from the beginning. If the BB winning effect or ending effect has reached the final stage at the time of power interruption, the BB winning effect or ending effect is not executed from the elapsed stage at the next start-up, but the final stage state. It will return to. Further, when the RAM parity calculated based on the data stored in all areas of the RAM 91c at the time of startup is not 0 (in the case of 1), it is determined that the RAM is abnormal, and all areas of the RAM 91c are initialized. It has become.

  Next, a description will be given of the relationship between the setting of bets and the settlement of credits (including medals used for setting bets) and effects. 10 to 20 are timing charts showing a period in which the setting of the bet number is allowed and a period in which the credit settlement is allowed.

  As shown in FIG. 10, while the game is not being executed, setting of the bet number and credit settlement are permitted. In this state, a medal is inserted or the bet number of credits is used. Settings are controlled to be possible. If a bet number can be set and a prescribed number of bets according to the gaming state is not set, the bet number is incremented by one each time a medal is detected. Further, if a prescribed number of bets corresponding to the gaming state is set, a credit is added by one each time a medal is detected. When the credit reaches the upper limit (50 sheets in this embodiment), the flow path switching solenoid 30 is turned off, the flow path of the inserted medal is switched to the medal payout exit 9 side, and the insertion of the medal is prohibited. The If the credits remain, the number of bets is set according to these switches by operating the single BET switch 5 or the MAXBET switch 6, and the amount is subtracted from the credits. Further, if the credits remain or the bet number is set, the operation of the settlement switch 10 is used to set the medal and the bet amount stored as credits by driving the hopper motor 34. The given amount of medals is paid out and returned to the player, and credits and bets are subtracted according to the medals paid out.

  When the start switch 7 is operated in a state where the setting of the bet amount and the credit settlement are permitted, and the game is started, the setting of the bet amount and the credit settlement are prohibited at that time. Specifically, the flow path switching solenoid 30 is turned off, the flow path of the inserted medal is switched to the medal payout exit 9 side, and the operation of the one-sheet BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, and the settlement switch 10 is invalidated. The time when the game is started is not the time when the rotation of the reel is started, but the time when the control stage is shifted by operating the start switch 7. This is because a certain period of time has not elapsed since the start of the previous game, and there is a case where a wait is applied. At this time, the start of reel rotation waits, but the game is started as a control stage.

  Thereafter, the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is stopped, and the display result is derived for all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. When the display result is derived, it is determined that the game has ended, and when the end of the game is determined, the setting of the bet amount and the prohibition of credit settlement are lifted, and the setting of the bet amount and credit settlement are permitted. It becomes a state. As an exception, when a replay win occurs, the bet number is automatically set, so setting of the bet number by the player's operation remains prohibited. Credit settlement is also prohibited.

  As a result of stopping the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, if a winning with a medal payout has occurred, display results are derived for all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R as shown in FIG. At the time, the end of the game is not determined, and when the medal payout associated with the occurrence of the winning is completed, the end of the game is determined, and at that time, the setting of the bet amount and the prohibition of the credit settlement are released, Number setting and credit settlement are permitted.

  If the big bonus (1) winning or the big bonus (2) winning has occurred as a result of the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R being stopped, as shown in FIG. 12, all reels 2L, 2C, 2R At the time when the display result is derived, the end of the game is determined, and the CPU 91a executes the BB winning effect. The production at the time of winning the BB is composed of a progress stage and a final stage. First, when the transition stage is completed, the stage shifts to the progress stage where the dynamic production is performed over the production time of the stage at the time of winning the BB prize. It moves to the final stage where the state continues. On the other hand, the elapsed time from the time when the end of the game is determined by the CPU 41a is timed, and this elapsed time is set longer than the period until the above-mentioned BB winning effect is reached at the final stage. The setting of the number of bets remains prohibited until the time effect stage waiting time is reached, and the elapsed time from the time when the end of the game is determined reaches the stage waiting time for the BB winning effect. Thus, the prohibition of the setting of the betting number is released, and the setting of the betting number is permitted. On the other hand, with regard to credit settlement, the prohibition is lifted when the end of the game is determined, and credit settlement is permitted from that point.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 13 and 14, after the end of the game in which the big bonus (1) winning or the big bonus (2) winning has been determined, the elapsed time counted by the CPU 41a is the BB winning effect. If a power interruption occurs in the period until the presentation waiting time is reached and then returns, the elapsed time from the time when the end of the game is determined is restarted from the state of the power interruption. That is, the main control unit 41 backs up the counter value for timing the production waiting time of the BB winning effect at the time of power interruption, and at the next start-up, the BB winning effect effect is based on the backed up counter value. Since the waiting time is restarted, the time (Tb period in the figure) excluding the time (Ta period in the figure) that has already passed before the interruption from the production waiting time of the BB winning effect is restored when the interruption is restored. When the time has elapsed, the prohibition of the setting of the betting number is canceled and the setting of the betting number is permitted.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 13, when a power interruption occurs in the stage before the BB winning effect reaches the final stage and then returns, the BB winning effect is executed from the beginning of the elapsed stage. Is done. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 14, when an interruption occurs in the stage after the BB winning effect reaches the final stage and then returns, the BB winning effect returns in the final stage state. In other words, the sub-control unit 91 determines whether the BB winning effect being executed at the time of power interruption is in the elapsed stage or the final stage (for example, a flag indicating that the BB winning effect has reached the final stage or the BB winning effect) Only when the BB winning effect is backed up at the time of the next activation, the BB winning effect is executed from the beginning of the elapsed step, If it is backed up that the BB winning effect is in the final stage, the BB winning effect will return to the final stage. Regardless of whether the BB winning effect is in the progress stage or the final stage, when the bet number is set and the BET command is received from the main control unit 41 side, the BB winning effect is canceled at that time. Thus, an effect corresponding to the BET command is executed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 15, after the end of the game in which the big bonus (1) winning or the big bonus (2) winning has been determined, the elapsed time counted by the CPU 41a waits for the production of the BB winning effect. In the period until the time is reached, for example, the settlement of credit is executed, and when the payout error occurs during the payout of medals accompanying the settlement, it is determined that the game is finished. The elapsed time from the point in time is restarted from the state when the error occurred. That is, the main control unit 41 maintains the counter value for timing the production waiting time of the BB winning effect even during the error occurrence, and after canceling the error, the BB winning effect based on the maintained counter value. When the payout error is canceled, the time excluding the time already passed before the occurrence of the payout error (period Tc in the figure) is removed when the payout error is canceled. When the period of (medium Td) elapses, the prohibition of the setting of the betting number is canceled and the setting of the betting number is permitted.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 15, when a payout error occurs in the stage before the final stage of the BB winning effect reaches the final stage, and the payout error is canceled, the effect at the BB winning stage is an elapsed stage. It is executed from the beginning. On the other hand, although not particularly illustrated, when a payout error occurs at the stage after the BB winning effect has reached the final stage and the payout error is canceled, the BB winning effect is at the final stage as in the case of power interruption. It returns in the state of. In other words, the sub-control unit 91 maintains data only on whether the BB winning effect being executed at the time of an error is in the elapsed stage or the final stage, and when the error is canceled, the BB winning effect is in the elapsed stage. If data to that effect is maintained, the BB winning effect is executed from the beginning of the progress stage, and if the data indicating that the BB winning effect is in the final stage is maintained, the BB winning effect is the final stage. It will return in the state of. Regardless of whether the BB winning effect is in the progress stage or the final stage, when the bet number is set and the BET command is received from the main control unit 41 side, the BB winning effect is canceled at that time. Thus, an effect corresponding to the BET command is executed.

  Also, in the game during the big bonus, as a result of the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R being stopped, the big bonus (1) or the big bonus (2) end condition is satisfied, that is, some winning is generated and the big bonus In the case where the total number of payouts exceeds 465 or 300, and the stop function and the automatic checkout function are disabled, as shown in FIG. At the same time, the end of the game is determined and the ending effect is executed by the CPU 91a. The ending effect is composed of an elapsed stage and a final stage, as in the case of the BB winning effect. First, a transition is made to an elapsed stage in which a dynamic effect is executed over the effect time of the ending effect. When is finished, the process proceeds to the final stage where the state is continued. On the other hand, the elapsed time from the time when the end of the game is determined by the CPU 41a is timed, and the elapsed time is set longer than the period until the ending effect reaches the final stage. The setting of the number of bets remains prohibited until the waiting time is reached, and the number of bets is set when the elapsed time from the time when the end of the game is determined reaches the ending effect production waiting time. The prohibition is canceled and the setting of the bet number is permitted. On the other hand, with regard to credit settlement, the prohibition is lifted when the end of the game is determined, and credit settlement is permitted from that point.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 13 and 14, after the end of the game in which the big bonus (1) or big bonus (2) end condition is established, the elapsed time counted by the CPU 41a is the ending effect. When a power interruption occurs in the period until the performance waiting time is reached and then returns, the elapsed time from the time when the end of the game is determined is restarted from the state at the time of the power interruption. In other words, the main control unit 41 backs up the counter value for timing the ending effect production waiting time at the time of power interruption, and at the next activation, measures the ending effect production waiting time based on the counter value that is backed up. Therefore, when power is restored, the bet is made when the time (Tb in the figure) excluding the time (Ta period in the figure) that has already passed before the power interruption from the waiting time for the ending effect has elapsed. The prohibition of the setting of the number is released, and the setting of the betting number is permitted.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 13, when a power interruption occurs at a stage before the ending effect reaches the final stage and then returns, the ending effect is executed from the beginning of the elapsed stage. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 14, when a power interruption occurs at a stage after the ending effect reaches the final stage and then returns, the ending effect returns to the final stage. In other words, the sub-control unit 91 determines whether the ending effect being executed at the time of power interruption is in the elapsed stage or the final stage (for example, after the flag or ending effect indicating that the ending effect has reached the final stage is executed). (Elapsed time) is backed up, and the next time it is activated, it is backed up that the ending effect is in the elapsed stage (for example, when the flag indicating that the ending effect has reached the final stage is set or the ending effect) If the ending effect is executed from the beginning of the elapsed stage and the fact that the ending effect is in the final stage is backed up, the ending effect is It will return in the final stage. Regardless of whether the ending effect is in the progress stage or the final stage, when the bet number is set and the BET command is received from the main control unit 41 side, the ending effect is canceled at that time, and the BET command An effect corresponding to is performed.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 15, after the end of the game in which the big bonus (1) or the big bonus (2) end condition is established, the elapsed time counted by the CPU 41a is the effect of the BB winning effect. In the period until the waiting time is reached, for example, credit settlement is executed, and when a payout error occurs during the payout of medals associated with the settlement, the game end is determined. Restart the elapsed time from the time when the error occurred. That is, the main control unit 41 maintains the counter value for timing the ending effect stage waiting time even during the occurrence of an error, and after the error is released, the ending effect stage waiting time is based on the maintained counter value. Therefore, when the payout error is canceled, the time (Td period in the figure) excluding the time already passed before the occurrence of the payout error (period Tc in the figure) from the production waiting time of the ending effect is released. When the time has elapsed, the prohibition of the setting of the betting number is canceled and the setting of the betting number is permitted.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 15, when a payout error occurs in the stage before the ending effect reaches the final stage and the payout error is canceled, the ending effect is executed from the beginning of the elapsed stage. The On the other hand, although not particularly shown, when a payout error occurs at the stage after the ending effect reaches the final stage, and the payout error is canceled, the ending effect returns to the final stage as in the case of power interruption. To do. That is, the sub-control unit 91 maintains only data indicating whether the ending effect being executed is in the elapsed stage or the final stage when the error occurs, and when the error is canceled, the data indicating that the ending effect is in the elapsed stage If the ending effect is maintained, the ending effect is executed from the beginning of the elapsed stage, and if the data indicating that the ending effect is in the final stage is maintained, the ending effect returns to the final stage state. Regardless of whether the ending effect is in the progress stage or the final stage, when the bet number is set and the BET command is received from the main control unit 41 side, the ending effect is canceled at that time, and the BET command An effect corresponding to is performed.

  Also, in a game in which the big bonus (1) end condition is satisfied, if the stop function is set to be valid and the automatic checkout function is set to be invalid, as shown in FIG. When the payout is finished, the end of the game is determined, and the above-mentioned ending effect is executed by the CPU 91a. On the other hand, the elapsed time from the time when the end of the game is determined by the CPU 41a is timed, and the elapsed time is set longer than the period until the ending effect reaches the final stage. Since the stop state is controlled when the waiting time is reached, the reset switch 23 or the reset / setting switch 38 is operated even when the elapsed time from the time when the end of the game is determined reaches the rendering waiting time of the ending effect. Until the bet is set, the setting of the bet number remains prohibited. When the reset switch 23 or the reset / setting switch 38 is operated and the stop state is released, the setting of the bet number is also released. The bet number setting is permitted. On the other hand, with regard to credit settlement, the prohibition is lifted when the end of the game is determined, and credit settlement is permitted from that point.

  Also, if the game has the big bonus (1) termination condition and the automatic settlement function and the stop function are set to be effective, as shown in FIG. Thus, the end of the game is determined and the above-mentioned ending effect is executed by the CPU 91a. On the other hand, the elapsed time from the time when the end of the game is determined by the CPU 41a is timed, and the elapsed time is set longer than the period until the ending effect reaches the final stage. When the waiting time is reached, the credit settlement process (automatic settlement) is performed, and then it is controlled to stop, so that the elapsed time from the time when the game is determined to reach the ending effect stage waiting time Even so, until the reset switch 23 or the reset / setting switch 38 is operated, the setting of the betting number remains prohibited, and the reset switch 23 or the reset / setting switch 38 is operated and the hit state is At the time when the bet is released, the prohibition on the setting of the bet number is also released, and the setting of the bet number is permitted.

  On the other hand, with respect to the credit settlement based on the settlement switch 10, the prohibition is canceled when the end of the game is determined, and the credit settlement is permitted from that point. Further, when an operation of the settlement switch 10 is detected before the ending effect is finished, a credit settlement is performed at that time, and a credit settlement based on the operation of the settlement switch 10 is performed. In this case, the credit is already zero when the credit settlement process based on the effective setting of the automatic settlement function is performed after the elapsed time from the time when the end of the game is determined reaches the production waiting time of the ending effect. Therefore, the credit settlement based on the effective setting of the automatic settlement function is not performed.

  Also, in the case of a game in which the big bonus (1) end condition is satisfied, when only the automatic settlement function is set to be effective, it is needless to say that the game ends when the medal payout ends. Is determined, and the above-mentioned ending effect is executed by the CPU 91a, and the elapsed time from the time when the end of the game is determined by the CPU 41a is set longer than the period until the ending effect reaches the final stage. When the production waiting time is reached, after the credit is settled based on the effective setting of the automatic settlement function, the prohibition of the setting of the betting number is canceled and the setting of the betting number is permitted.

  It should be noted that, in a game in which the big bonus (2) or the regular bonus end condition is satisfied, it is determined whether the end of the game or the end of the game is determined even if the automatic settlement function and the stop function are set to be effective. When the elapsed time from the time of reaching the ending effect production waiting time is reached, the setting of the betting amount is released and the setting of the betting amount is permitted without being controlled to credit settlement or stoppage. It becomes the state.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 18 and 19, after the end of the game in which the big bonus (1) end condition is satisfied is determined, the elapsed time counted by the CPU 41a reaches the effect waiting time for the ending effect. If a power interruption occurs during the period up to and then returns, the elapsed time from the time when the end of the game is determined is restarted from the state of power interruption. That is, at the time of restoration of power interruption, after a time (period Tf in the figure) excluding time (period Te in the figure) that has already passed before the power interruption from the waiting time of the ending effect, the reset switch 23 or reset / When the setting switch 38 is operated and the stop state is released, the bet number setting prohibition is also released, and the bet number setting is permitted.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 18, when a power interruption occurs at a stage before the ending effect reaches the final stage and then returns, the ending effect is executed from the beginning of the elapsed stage. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 19, when a power interruption occurs at a stage after the ending effect reaches the final stage and then returns, the ending effect returns to the final stage. Regardless of whether the ending effect is an elapsed stage or a final stage, when a stop state occurs and a stop command indicating that is received from the main control unit 41 side, the ending effect is Will be canceled and notification during stoppage will be executed. When the stop state is released in this state and a stop command indicating that is received from the main control unit 41 side, the stop notification is stopped and the standby effect is executed.

  18 and 19, when the automatic checkout function is set to be effective, the time (excluding the period of Te in the figure) excluding the time already passed before power interruption from the production waiting time of the ending effect ( The credit is settled at the time when the period (Tf in the figure) elapses, and then it is controlled to a stop state.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 20, after the end of the game in which the big bonus (1) end condition is satisfied is determined, the elapsed time counted by the CPU 41a reaches the effect waiting time of the BB winning effect. In this period, for example, credit settlement based on the operation of the settlement switch 10 is executed, and when the payout error occurs during the payout of medals accompanying the settlement, the game end is determined. The elapsed time from the point in time is restarted from the state when the error occurred. That is, when the payout error is canceled, after the time (time period Tg in the figure) excluding the time already passed before the occurrence of the payout error (period Tg in the figure) from the rendering waiting time of the ending effect, the reset switch 23 or the reset / setting switch 38 is operated, and when the batting state is released, the bet number setting prohibition is also released, and the bet number setting is permitted.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 20, when a payout error occurs in the stage before the ending effect reaches the final stage and the payout error is canceled, the ending effect is executed from the beginning of the elapsed stage. The On the other hand, although not particularly shown, when a payout error occurs at the stage after the ending effect reaches the final stage, and the payout error is canceled, the ending effect returns to the final stage as in the case of power interruption. To do. Regardless of whether the ending effect is an elapsed stage or a final stage, when a stop state occurs and a stop command indicating that is received from the main control unit 41 side, the ending effect is Will be canceled and notification during stoppage will be executed. When the stop state is released in this state and a stop command indicating that is received from the main control unit 41 side, the stop notification is stopped and the standby effect is executed.

  In the present embodiment, the end condition of the big bonus (1) is that the total number of payouts in the big bonus exceeds 465. Therefore, in a game where the end condition of the big bonus is satisfied, the medal must be paid out. Therefore, the end of the game is determined when the payout is completed. For example, when the fact that the big bonus reaches the specified number of games is applied as an end condition, the end condition of the big bonus is The established game may not be accompanied by payout of medals. In such a case, the end of the game is determined when the display results of all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are derived.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 21 and 22, the operation of the slot machine 1 according to the operation of the settlement switch in the state where the bet amount is set and the credit is present will be described. FIG. 21 and FIG. 22 are timing charts showing the relationship between the operation of the settlement switch 10 and the medal discharging operation, the BET number update display, and the credit number update display.

  In particular, FIG. 21A shows Example 1 relating to the operation of the settlement switch 10 in the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment. FIG. 21B, FIG. 21C, FIG. 22D, FIG. 22E, FIG. 22F, and FIG. 22G show the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, respectively. Examples 2 to 6 relating to the operation of the settlement switch 10 in FIG.

  Each figure is an example in which the number of bets is 2 and the number of credits is 30, but if the number of bets is set (the number of bets> 0) and there are 1 or more credits A similar operation corresponding to each bet number and credit number is performed.

  The “BET number display” indicates the display state of the bet number indicated by the lighting positions of the 1 to 3 BET LEDs 14 to 16, and the “credit number display” indicates the credit number indicated by the credit indicator 11. The “hopper motor drive signal” indicates a signal output from the main control unit 41 to the hopper motor 34. Each time one pulse of the signal is output, one medal is discharged from the hopper tank.

[Embodiment 1 regarding the operation of the settlement switch 10]
First, Example 1 will be described. In the first embodiment, when the first operation of the settlement switch 10 is detected, a hopper motor drive signal is output to the hopper motor 34, so that the number of medals corresponding to the set bet number is one by one. The set number of bets will be cancelled. Subsequently, when the second operation of the settlement switch 10 is detected, medals corresponding to the number of credits are discharged.

  As shown in FIG. 21A, every time a medal is ejected based on the first operation, the display of the BET number changes to 2, 1, 0. At this time, the counter value of the BET counter that stores the bet number is also sequentially subtracted and updated. Similarly, every time a medal is ejected based on the second operation, the display of the number of credits changes to 30, 29, 28... 1, 0. At this time, the counter value of the credit counter that stores the number of credits is also sequentially subtracted and updated.

  According to the first embodiment, the set number of bets can be canceled once by the first operation of the settlement switch 10. In addition, since the canceling operation can be performed with the settlement switch 10, the operability is improved as compared with the case where an operation switch dedicated to cancellation is provided.

  Further, by performing the second operation following the first operation of the settlement switch 10, it is possible to settle the credit following the cancellation of the bet amount. Convenience can be improved for a player who wants to finish a game in a slot machine.

  In addition, after the first operation of the settlement switch 10, the betting operation using the single BET switch 5 or the MAXBET switch 6 is performed again without performing the second operation, thereby resetting the number of bets again. Is possible. Further, when the first operation of the settlement switch 10 is performed, if the bet number is not set, a process of discharging medals corresponding to the credit number is executed (this point is applied in the second to second embodiments). The same applies to Example 6.)

[Embodiment 2 relating to operation of checkout switch 10]
Next, Example 2 will be described. In the second embodiment, the operation by the first operation and the operation by the second operation are opposite to those of the first embodiment. That is, in the second embodiment, when the first operation of the settlement switch 10 is detected, medals corresponding to the number of credits are discharged and credits are returned to the player. Subsequently, when the second operation of the settlement switch 10 is detected, the number of medals corresponding to the set bet number is discharged and the setting of the bet number is cancelled.

  As shown in FIG. 21B, every time a medal is ejected based on the first operation, the display of the number of credits changes to 30, 29, 28. At this time, the counter value of the credit counter that stores the number of credits is also sequentially subtracted and updated. Similarly, every time a medal is ejected based on the second operation, the display of the BET number changes to 2, 1, 0. At this time, the counter value of the BET counter that stores the bet number is also sequentially subtracted and updated.

  According to the second embodiment, similarly to the first embodiment, it is possible to cancel the set bet number once by operating the settlement switch 10. In addition, since the canceling operation can be performed with the settlement switch 10, the operability is improved as compared with the case where an operation switch dedicated to cancellation is provided.

  Further, unlike the first embodiment, after the credit is settled by the first operation of the settlement switch 10, the bet number setting is canceled by the second operation, so the original function of the settlement switch 10 has priority. It is hard to give a strange feeling to unfamiliar players.

  Note that, after the first operation of the settlement switch 10, the game with the set bet number is started by performing the start operation without performing the second operation. If no credit is present when the first operation of the settlement switch 10 is detected, a process for canceling the set bet amount is executed.

[Embodiment 3 regarding the operation of the settlement switch 10]
Next, Example 3 will be described. The third embodiment is the same as the first embodiment in that when the first operation of the settlement switch 10 is detected, the set bet number is canceled, but medals corresponding to the canceled bet number are discharged. This is different from the first embodiment in that credits corresponding to the number of bets canceled are added. Then, according to the second operation of the settlement switch 10, the hopper motor drive signal is output to the hopper motor 34, and the medal corresponding to the number of credits is discharged. It is the same.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 21 (c), each time the betting number display is subtracted from 2 to 1 and 0 based on the first operation, the credit number display is changed from 30 to 31, 32. Added and updated. At this time, the value of the BET counter is also subtracted and updated in accordance with the update of the betting number display, and the value of the credit counter is similarly updated in accordance with the update of the credit number display. Then, every time a medal is discharged based on the second operation, the credit number display changes to 31, 30, 29... 1, 0. At this time, the counter value of the credit counter that stores the number of credits is also sequentially subtracted and updated.

  According to the third embodiment, similarly to the first embodiment, it is possible to cancel the set bet number once by operating the settlement switch 10. In addition, since the canceling operation can be performed with the settlement switch 10, the operability is improved as compared with the case where an operation switch dedicated to cancellation is provided.

  Further, unlike the first embodiment, the medal is not discharged when the setting of the betting amount is canceled by the first operation of the settlement switch 10, but the second operation is performed after the conversion into credit once. It is processed as credit settlement in a lump. For this reason, for example, after canceling the setting of the betting number by the first operation of the settlement switch 10, the player who performs the operation of setting the betting amount again without operating the second settlement switch 10 is performed. Therefore, it is possible to save the trouble of re-inserting the medals that are bothered.

[Embodiment 4 regarding operation of settlement switch 10]
Next, Example 4 will be described. In the fourth embodiment, compared to the first embodiment, the number of medals corresponding to the set number of bets is discharged and the setting of the number of bets is canceled based on only the first operation of the settlement switch 10. And the operation of discharging medals corresponding to the number of credits are executed in that order.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 22 (d), a hopper motor drive signal is output to the hopper motor 34 based on the first operation, and the bet number is displayed every time a medal equivalent to the bet number is discharged. 1 and 0, and each time a medal corresponding to the number of credits is discharged, the display of the number of credits changes to 30, 29, 28.

  According to the fourth embodiment, it is possible to cancel the bet amount and the credit settlement with only the first operation of the settlement switch 10, and compared with the first embodiment, It is possible to improve the operability when performing credit adjustment together.

[Embodiment 5 regarding the operation of the settlement switch 10]
Next, Example 5 will be described. In the fifth embodiment, compared to the fourth embodiment, an operation for discharging the number of medals corresponding to the set number of bets and canceling the setting of the number of bets based only on the first operation of the settlement switch 10. And the operation of discharging medals corresponding to the number of credits are the same, but the point of difference between the two operations is different from the fourth embodiment. Alternatively, in the fifth embodiment, unlike the second embodiment, an operation for canceling the setting of the betting amount and an operation for discharging a medal corresponding to the number of credits are executed based only on the first operation of the settlement switch 10. It can be said that it is a thing.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 22 (e), a hopper motor drive signal is output to the hopper motor 34 based on the first operation, so that every time a medal equivalent to the credit amount is discharged, The display changes to 30, 29, 28... 1, 0, and then, every time a medal corresponding to the bet number is discharged, the display of the BET number changes to 2, 1, 0.

  According to the fifth embodiment, it is possible to perform credit settlement and bet number cancellation only by the first operation of the settlement switch 10, and compared with the second embodiment, bet number cancellation and credit. The operability can be improved when performing the checkout together.

[Embodiment 6 regarding operation of settlement switch 10]
Next, Example 6 will be described. In the sixth embodiment, as compared with the third embodiment, an operation for adding the canceled bet amount to credits based on only the first operation of the settlement switch 10 and an operation for discharging medals equivalent to the credit number are provided. Is different from the third embodiment in that is executed.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 22 (f), only when the betting number display is subtracted from 2 to 1 and 0 based on the first operation, the credit number display is 30 to 31, 32. Each time the medal corresponding to the credit is discharged by outputting the hopper motor drive signal to the hopper motor 34, the display of the number of credits changes to 31, 30, 29... 1, 0. To do.

  According to the sixth embodiment, it is possible to cancel the bet amount and to settle the credit by only the first operation of the settlement switch 10. Compared to the third embodiment, the bet number cancellation and the credit can be performed. The operability can be improved when performing the checkout together.

Above, description of Example 1-Example 6 regarding operation of the settlement switch 10 is finished.
Next, various control contents executed by the CPU 41a of the main control unit 41 in the present embodiment will be described below with reference to FIGS.

  When the reset signal is input from the reset circuit 49, the CPU 41a performs the startup process shown in the flowchart of FIG. Since the reset signal is a signal output when the power is turned on and when the operation of the main control unit 41 is stagnant, the activation process is performed when the CPU 41a is activated when the power is turned on and when the CPU 41a is activated due to a malfunction. Processing to be performed.

  In the start-up process, first, the built-in device, peripheral IC, interrupt mode, stack pointer, etc. are initialized (Sa1), then the voltage drop signal detection data is acquired from the input port, and whether or not the voltage drop signal is input. That is, it is determined whether or not the voltage is stable (Sa2), and when the voltage drop signal is input, any processing other than the determination of whether or not the voltage drop signal is input is performed. There is no loop processing.

  If it is determined in step Sa2 that the voltage drop signal is not input, the values of the I register and IY register are initialized (Sa3). Next, the state of the stop switch 36 is acquired, the enable / disable setting of the stop function is set in a specific register of the CPU 41a, the state of the automatic checkout switch 110 is acquired, and the automatic checkout function is set in the specific register of the CPU 41a. Valid / invalid is set (Sa4). By initialization of the I register and the IY register, an interrupt table address to be referred to when an interrupt occurs is set in the I register, and a reference address for referring to the storage area of the RAM 41c is set in the IY register. . These values are fixed values and are always initialized at startup.

  Next, access to the RAM 41c is permitted (Sa5), and it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 37 is in an ON state (Sa6). If the setting key switch 37 is not in the ON state in step Sa6, the RAM parity of all storage areas (including the unused area and the unused stack area) of the RAM 41c is calculated (Sa7). Is determined (Sa8). If the power interruption interrupt processing is normally performed, the RAM parity should be 0. If the RAM parity is not 0 in the step Sa8, the data stored in the RAM 41c is not normal. An error code indicating abnormality is set in the register (Sa10), and the process proceeds to error processing shown in FIG.

  If the RAM parity is 0 in step Sa8, it is further determined whether or not the destructive diagnosis data is normal (Sa9). If the power interruption interrupt processing is normally performed, the data for destruction diagnosis should be set. If the data for destruction diagnosis is not normal in step Sa9 (the data for destruction diagnosis is stored at the time of power interruption. Since the data in the RAM 41c is not normal, the error code indicating the RAM abnormality is set in the register (Sa10), and the process proceeds to the error process shown in FIG.

  In the error processing, as shown in FIG. 24, the current display state of the game auxiliary display 12 is saved in the stack (Sb1), and the error code stored in the register is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 (Sb2). .

  Next, the error code stored in the register is confirmed, it is determined whether or not the error code is an error code indicating a RAM abnormal error (Sb3), and if it is an error code indicating a RAM abnormal error, After initialization 1 for initializing all the storage areas except the used stack area in the storage area of the RAM 41c (Sb4), the process proceeds to a loop process in which no process is performed.

  If it is determined in step Sb3 that the error code is not an error other than a RAM abnormality, it is determined whether an operation of the reset / setting switch 38 is detected (Sb5), and the reset / setting switch 38 is detected. If the operation of the reset switch 23 is not detected, it is further determined whether or not the operation of the reset switch 23 is detected (Sb6). If the operation of the reset switch 23 is not detected, the process returns to the step Sb4. That is, the game waits in a state where the progress of the game is impossible until the operation of the reset / setting switch 38 or the reset switch 23 is detected.

  When the operation of the reset / setting switch 38 is detected in the step Sb5 or when the operation of the reset switch 23 is detected in the step Sb6, the error code stored in the register is cleared (Sb7 ), The display state of the game auxiliary display 12 is returned to the display state saved in the stack in the step Sb1 (Sb8), and the process returns to the original process.

  As described above, in the error processing, if the error processing is other than the RAM abnormality error, the reset / setting switch 38 or the reset switch 23 is operated to return to the original processing even if the error state is canceled. In the case of error processing due to a RAM abnormality error, the error state is not canceled even if the reset / setting switch 38 or the reset switch 23 is operated.

  Returning to FIG. 23, when it is determined in the step Sa9 that the data for failure diagnosis is normal, the data in the RAM 41c is normal, so the unsaved work, the unused area, and the unused stack area in the RAM 41c are initialized. After initialization 3 is performed (Sa11), the destruction diagnosis data is cleared (Sa12). Next, each register is restored to the state before the power interruption, that is, the state saved in the stack (Sa13), the interrupt is permitted (Sa14), and the process that was executed last before the power interruption is returned.

  If the setting key switch 37 is in the ON state in the step of Sa6, after executing initialization 1 for initializing all storage areas in the storage area of the RAM 41c except the used stack area (Sa15), The value (0 at this time) stored in the set value work 1 is corrected to 1 (Sa16). Next, interruption is permitted (Sa17), and the setting change process shown in FIG. 25, that is, the setting change mode is entered (Sa18). After the setting change process is completed, the process proceeds to the game process.

  In the setting change process, as shown in FIG. 25, the setting value stored in the setting value work 1 of the RAM 41c (the value of the setting value work 1 is corrected to 1 before shifting to the setting changing process. Is 1) (Sc1).

  After that, the operation waits for detection of the operation of the reset / setting switch 38 and the start switch 7 (Sc2, Sc3). When the operation of the reset / setting switch 38 is detected in the step of Sc2, the setting value read in the step of Sc1. 1 is added to (Sc4), and it is determined whether or not the set value after addition is 7, that is, whether or not the settable range is exceeded (Sc5). If the set value after addition is not 7, After returning to the detection waiting state for the operation of the reset / setting switch 38 and the start switch 7 in the steps Sc2 and Sc3 again, if the setting value after addition is 7 in the step Sc5, the setting value is corrected to 1 (Sc6). ), The process returns to the detection waiting state for the operation of the reset / setting switch 38 and the start switch 7 in the steps Sc2 and Sc3.

  When the operation of the start switch 7 is detected in the step of Sc3, the changed set values selected at that time are stored in the set value works 1 to 3 of the RAM 41c, respectively, and the set values are confirmed. (Sc7) Wait until the setting key switch 37 is turned off (Sc8). If it is determined in step Sc8 that the setting key switch 37 is OFF, the process returns to the flowchart of FIG. 23 and the process proceeds to the game process.

  As described above, in the startup process, when the setting key switch 37 is not in the ON state, it is stored in the RAM 41c by determining whether or not the RAM parity is 0 and whether or not the destructive diagnosis data is normal. It is determined whether the stored data is normal. If the data in the RAM 41c is not normal, the process proceeds to error processing. In the error processing due to the RAM abnormal error, an error code indicating the RAM abnormal error is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12, and then the process proceeds to a loop process in which no processing is performed, so that the progress of the game is disabled. If the data in the RAM 41c is not normal, interrupts are not permitted. Therefore, once the process shifts to error processing due to a RAM error, the setting key switch 37 is activated and interrupts are permitted. Until it is interrupted, no interruption interruption processing is performed even if the interruption occurs. That is, the RAM adjustment data is not calculated and stored so that the RAM parity is newly set to 0 in the power interruption interrupt process, and the destruction diagnosis data is not newly set. Even if the game is started, the game cannot be resumed even if the CPU 41a is restarted except when the setting key switch 37 is turned on.

  Then, once the process shifts to an error process due to a RAM abnormality error, the setting key switch 37 is activated in an ON state, and after all areas except the used stack area of the RAM 41c are initialized, a setting change process is performed. The game cannot be progressed until a new set value is selected and set by operating the reset / setting switch 38. In other words, in the state where the error processing due to the RAM abnormality error is started, the state in which the game cannot be progressed is canceled and the game is resumed on the condition that a new set value is selected and set by operating the reset / setting switch 38. It becomes possible to make it.

  FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the game process executed by the CPU 41a.

  In the game process, a BET process (Sd1), an internal lottery process (Sd2), a reel rotation process (Sd3), a winning determination process (Sd4), a payout process (Sd5), and a game end process (Sd6) are sequentially executed. When the end-time process ends, the process returns to the BET process again.

  In the BET process in the step of Sd1, the process waits in a state where the bet number can be set, sets a predetermined number of bets according to the gaming state, and executes a process of determining the bet number when the start switch 7 is operated. To do.

  In the internal lottery process in step Sd2, a random number for internal lottery is extracted simultaneously with the start of the game by the detection of the start switch 7 in step Sd1, and the winning of each above-described combination is permitted based on the extracted random number value. Processing to determine whether or not. In this internal lottery process, a winning flag is set in the RAM 41c based on the respective lottery results.

  In the reel rotation process in the step of Sd3, the process of rotating each reel 2L, 2C, 2R and the operation of the corresponding reel 2L, 2C, 2R in response to the operation of the stop switch 8L, 8C, 8R detected by the player are detected. A process for stopping the rotation is executed.

  In the winning determination process in step Sd4, when it is determined in step Sd3 that the rotation of all the reels 2L, 2C, 2R has stopped, a winning is determined according to the display result derived for each reel 2L, 2C, 2R. A process of determining whether or not it has occurred is executed.

  In the payout process in step Sd5, when it is determined in step Sd4 that a winning has occurred, processing such as addition of credits and payout of medals is performed based on the number of payouts according to the win.

  In the game end process in the step of Sd6, a process for setting a gaming state in preparation for the next game is executed.

  27 and 28 are flowcharts showing the control contents of the BET process executed by the CPU 41a in step Sd1.

  In the BET process, first, the value of the BET counter in which the value of the bet number is stored in the RAM 41c is cleared (Se1), and the specified number according to the gaming state (the specified number of bets determined according to the gaming state is set). In the regular bonus, 1 is set. In the normal game state, 3 is set.) Is set in the RAM 41c (Se2), and the replay game flag indicating that the game is a replay game is set in the RAM 41c. Whether or not the game is a replay game is determined based on whether or not it is played (Se3).

  If it is determined in step Se3 that the game is a replay game, the value of the BET counter is incremented by 1 (Se4), the specified number of bets set in the RAM 41c is referred to, and the value of the BET counter is It is determined whether or not the number is a prescribed number (Se5), and if the value of the BET counter is not the prescribed number, the process returns to the step of Se4. The RAM 41c is set (Se6), and the process proceeds to the Se8 step.

  If it is determined that the game is not a replay game in the step of Se3, the setting before waiting for input is performed (Se7), and the process proceeds to the step of Se8. In the setting before waiting for input, the input disable flag set in the RAM 41c is cleared, and the detection of the single BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, and the settlement switch 10 is validated.

  In step Se8, it is determined whether or not a medal can be inserted based on whether or not the insertion prohibition flag is set in the RAM 41c. When it is determined in step Se8 that the medal can be inserted, the flow path switching solenoid 30 is turned on, and the medal can be inserted using the medal flow path as a path on the hopper tank side. If it is determined that the medal can not be inserted, the flow path switching solenoid 30 is set to the off state, and the medal flow path is the path on the medal payout exit 9 side. As a result, the insertion of a new medal is prohibited (Se10), and the process proceeds to Se11.

  In step Se11, it is determined whether or not the inserted medal sensor 31 has detected passage of the inserted medal. If the passage of the inserted medal is not detected in the step of Se11, the process proceeds to the step of Se18. If the passage of the inserted medal is detected, the insertion of the medal is performed based on whether or not the insertion impossible flag is set in the RAM 41c. It is determined whether or not it is possible to enter the token (Se12). If the medal cannot be inserted, the process proceeds to Step Se18.

  In the present embodiment, when the passage of the inserted medal is detected in the step Se11 and it is determined that the medal cannot be inserted in the step Se12, that is, the medal cannot be inserted. When a so-called medal swallowing is detected when the passage of a medal is detected, the process proceeds to the step of Se18 without adding 1 to the value of the BET counter. At this time, the process may proceed to error processing. .

  If the medal can be inserted in the step of Se12, the prescribed number of bets set in the RAM 41c is referred to determine whether or not the value of the BET counter is the prescribed number (Se13). If the value is not the specified number, 1 is added to the value of the BET counter (Se14), and the process returns to the Se8 step.

  If the value of the BET counter is a prescribed number in the step of Se13, 1 is added to the value of the credit counter in which the credit value is stored in the RAM 41c (Se15), and whether or not the value of the credit counter is 50 which is the upper limit value. If the value of the credit counter is not 50, the process returns to the step of Se8. If the value of the credit counter is 50, the insertion impossible flag is set in the RAM 41c (Se17), and the process returns to the step of Se8. .

  In step Se18, it is determined whether an operation of the start switch 7 is detected. If the operation of the start switch 7 is not detected in the step of Se18, the process proceeds to the step of Se22. If the operation of the start switch 7 is detected, the specified number of bets set in the RAM 41c is referred to and the BET counter It is determined whether or not the value is a specified number (Se19).

  If the value of the BET counter is not a specified number in the step of Se19, the process returns to the step of Se8, and if the value of the BET counter is a specified number, the input impossible flag is set in the RAM 41c and the flow path switching solenoid 30 is turned off. The state is set, the medal flow path is set as a path on the medal payout exit 9 side, insertion of a new medal is prohibited (Se20), and the setting at the start of the game is performed (Se21). In the setting at the start of the game, detection of operations of the single BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, and the checkout switch 10 is invalidated. Then, after the step of Se21, the BET process is terminated and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG. Along with this, setting of bets based on the insertion of medals, detection of the operation of the single BET switch 5 and the MAXBET switch 6 is prohibited, and the adjustment of credits based on the detection of the operation of the adjustment switch 10 is prohibited. It becomes. Note that the insertion impossible flag is not cleared until the BET process of the next game, and the detection of the operation of the single BET switch 5 and the MAX BET switch 6 is not cleared until the BET process of the next game. The bet number setting is prohibited until the BET process. In addition, the detection of the operation of the settlement switch 10 is not cleared until the next game BET processing except when the big bonus is won or the big bonus is ended. (Including medals used for setting) are prohibited. When the big bonus is won or the big bonus is over, the detection of the operation of the settlement switch 10 is effective when the game is finished (when the reel is stopped or when the medal payout is finished) without waiting for the BET process of the next game. Credits can be settled.

  In the step of Se22, it is determined whether or not an operation of the single BET switch 5 is detected. If the operation of the single BET switch 5 is not detected in the step of Se22, the process proceeds to the step of Se27, and if the operation of the single BET switch 5 is detected, the prescribed number of bets set in the RAM 41c is referred. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the BET counter is a specified number (Se23). If the value of the BET counter is the specified number in the step of Se23, the process returns to the step of Se8. If the value of the BET counter is not the specified number, it is determined whether or not the value of the credit counter is 0 (Se24). If the counter value is 0, the process returns to the Se8 step. If the value of the credit counter is not 0 in the step of Se24, 1 is subtracted from the value of the credit counter (Se25), 1 is added to the value of the BET counter (Se26), and the process returns to the step of Se8.

  In step Se27, it is determined whether or not an operation of the MAXBET switch 6 is detected. If the operation of the MAXBET switch 6 is not detected in the step of Se27, the process proceeds to the step of Se32, and if the operation of the MAXBET switch 6 is detected, the specified number of bets set in the RAM 41c is referred to, and the BET counter It is determined whether or not the value is a specified number (Se28). If the value of the BET counter is the specified number in the step of Se28, the process returns to the step of Se8. If the value of the BET counter is not the specified number, it is determined whether or not the value of the credit counter is 0 (Se29). If the counter value is 0, the process returns to the Se8 step. If the value of the credit counter is not 0 in the step of Se29, 1 is subtracted from the value of the credit counter (Se30), 1 is added to the value of the BET counter (Se31), and the process returns to the step of Se28.

  In the step of Se32, it is determined whether or not the operation of the settlement switch 10 is detected. If the operation of the settlement switch 10 is not detected in the step of Se32, the process returns to the step of Se8. If the operation of the settlement switch 10 is detected, the operation is based on whether or not the replay game flag is set in the RAM 41c. It is determined whether or not the game is a replay game (Se33). If the game is a replay game, the process returns to step Se8. If the game is not a replay game in the step of Se33, it is determined whether or not the value of the BET counter is 0 (Se34). If the value of the BET counter is 0, the process proceeds to the step of Se36, and the value of the BET counter is 0. Otherwise, a bet amount settlement flag indicating that the already set bet amount is to be settled is set in the RAM 41c (Se35), and the process proceeds to the step of Se36. In step Se36, the hopper motor 34 is driven to pay out medals corresponding to the value stored in the credit counter or BET counter, that is, medals stored as credits or medals used for setting the number of bets. Checkout processing is performed in which the return control is performed. Then, after the settlement process in the step of Se36, the input impossible flag set in the RAM 41c is cleared (Se37), and the process returns to the step of Se8.

  FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the settlement process executed by the CPU 41a. This flowchart shows the settlement corresponding to [Embodiment 1] explained using FIG. 21A among [Each embodiment relating to the operation of the settlement switch 10] explained using FIG. 21 and FIG. It is processing.

  In the settlement process, first, it is determined whether or not the medals used for setting the bet amount are settled based on whether or not the bet amount settlement flag is set in the RAM 41c (Sf1). When the betting number settlement flag is set, the betting amount is settled instead of the credit settlement as described later. As a result, when an operation (first operation) of the settlement switch 10 in a state where the bet number is set is detected, as shown in the timing chart of FIG. Is discharged. Then, after the bet amount becomes zero by discharging the medals for the bet amount by this processing, when the operation of the settlement switch 10 (second operation) is detected again, the number of bets is determined in Sf1. It is determined that the medals used for the setting are not settled.

  If the medal used for setting the bet amount in the step of Sf1 is not settled, it is determined whether the value of the credit counter is 0 (Sf2). If the value of the credit counter is 0, the settlement process is terminated. Then, the process returns to the original process.

  If the value of the credit counter is not 0 in the step of Sf2, the insertion impossible flag is set in the RAM 41c, the flow path switching solenoid 30 is turned off, and the medal flow path is set as a path on the medal payout exit 9 side. Insertion is prohibited (Sf3), and one medal payout process is performed to control payout of one medal (Sf4).

  In the medal payout process in step Sf4, if the driving state of the hopper motor 34 is not on, the driving state of the hopper motor 34 is set to on. Then, the detection state of the payout sensor 35 is monitored, and when the payout sensor 35 detects the payout of one medal, it is determined that the medal is paid out, and the process proceeds to the next process. Further, when medals are continuously detected by the payout sensor 35 for a predetermined time or more, it is determined that the medals are jammed, the driving state of the hopper motor 34 is set to off, and an error code indicating a medal jammed error is set in the register. Then, the process proceeds to error processing shown in FIG. If no medal is detected by the payout sensor 35 for a certain period of time, the driving state of the hopper motor 34 is once turned off, and no medal is detected by the payout sensor 35 even if the driving of the hopper motor 34 is retried several times. In this case, after an error code indicating a hopper error (an error indicating a lack of medals in the hopper) is set in the register, the process proceeds to error processing shown in FIG. The error processing due to the medal jamming error or the hopper error is canceled by operating the reset switch 23 or the reset / setting switch 38, and after the cancellation, the processing returns to the top of the single medal payout processing.

  When one medal is paid out by the medal payout process in step Sf4, the value of the credit counter is decremented by 1 (Sf5), and it is determined whether the value of the credit counter is 0 (Sf6). If the value of the credit counter is not 0 in step Sf6, the process returns to step Sf4. If the value of the credit counter is 0, the driving state of the hopper motor 34 is set to off and the driving is stopped. Later (Sf7), the settlement process is terminated and the process returns to the original process.

  If it is the settlement of medals used for setting the number of bets in the step of Sf1, the insertion impossible flag is set in the RAM 41c, the flow path switching solenoid 30 is turned off, and the medal flow path is set to the medal payout exit. As a route on the 9th side, insertion of medals is prohibited (Sf3), and the same medal payout process as in step Sf4 is performed (Sf9).

  When one medal is paid out by the medal payout process in step Sf9, the value of the BET counter is decremented by 1 (Sf10), and it is determined whether or not the value of the BET counter is 0 (Sf11). If the value of the BET counter is not 0 in the step of Sf11, the process returns to the step of Sf9. If the value of the BET counter is 0, the betting number settlement flag set in the RAM 41c is cleared (Sf12). After the drive state of the hopper motor 34 is set to off and the drive is stopped (Sf7), the settlement process is terminated and the process returns to the original process.

  As described above, the settlement process has been described using the above-described first embodiment as a representative example. However, the settlement process for realizing the second to sixth embodiments illustrated in FIGS. 21 and 22 is performed according to the processes illustrated in FIGS. 28 and 29. It is realizable by changing suitably.

  For example, the settlement process corresponding to [Embodiment 2] (FIG. 21B) can be realized as follows. That is, Se34 and 35 are deleted. Further, Sf1 is set to “credit counter = 0?”. When NO, Sf3 to Sf7 are executed as shown in FIG. 29 and the process returns, and when YES, “betting number counter = 0?” Is determined. When the number counter is 0, the process returns. When the number counter is NO, Sf8 to Sf12 are executed as shown in FIG. 29, and the process proceeds to Sf7 and returns.

  The settlement process corresponding to [Embodiment 3] (FIG. 21C) can be realized as follows. That is, in place of the steps Sf9 to Sf11, “the step of adding the value of the betting number counter to the value of the credit counter and finally updating the value of the betting number counter to 0” is performed.

  The settlement process corresponding to [Embodiment 4] (FIG. 22D) can be realized as follows. That is, following Sf12, it is determined whether or not “credit counter = 0?”. If YES, the process proceeds to Sf7 and returns, and if NO, an additional step of executing Sf4 to Sf7 as shown in FIG. 29 is added and the process returns. .

  The settlement process corresponding to [Embodiment 5] (FIG. 22E) can be realized as follows. That is, Se34 and 35 are deleted. Further, Sf1 is set to “credit counter = 0?”, And when YES, Sf8 to Sf12 are executed as shown in FIG. 29 and the process returns, and when NO, Sf3 to Sf6 are executed as shown in FIG. When the answer is YES, the process proceeds to Sf7 and returns. On the other hand, if NO, Sf9 to Sf11 are executed as shown in FIG. 29. If Sf11 is YES, the process returns to Sf7. Go ahead and return.

  The settlement process corresponding to [Embodiment 6] (FIG. 22 (f)) can be realized as follows. That is, instead of the steps Sf8 to Sf11, the “step of adding the value of the betting number counter to the value of the credit counter and finally updating the value of the betting number counter to 0” is performed, and then the process proceeds to Sf12. Then, after the process of “clearing the betting number settlement flag”, the process proceeds to Sf3 instead of Sf7, and thereafter, Sf3 to Sf7 are executed as shown in FIG. 29 and the process returns.

  FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the internal lottery process executed by the CPU 41a in step Sd2.

  In the internal lottery process of the present embodiment, first, the number of inserted medals, that is, the value of the BET counter, the prescribed number that is a predetermined number of inserted medals according to the game state of the game, and the values of the set value works 1 to 3 Is read (Sg1), and the process proceeds to Sg2. The prescribed number is 3 in the normal gaming state and 1 in the regular bonus gaming state.

  In step Sg2, it is determined whether or not the number of inserted medals read in step Sg1 is a prescribed number. If the number of inserted medals is a prescribed number, the process proceeds to step Sg4. Proceed to step Sg3.

  In the step of Sg3, the inserted medal number is not the prescribed number according to the gaming state, and there is a possibility that the data stored in the RAM 41c may not be normal. Therefore, an error code indicating the RAM abnormality is stored in the register. Move on to error processing shown in.

  In the step of Sg4, a setting for determining whether or not the setting value used for the lottery based on the values of the setting value workpieces 1 to 3 read in the step of Sg1, that is, the setting value stored in the setting value workpiece 1 is appropriate. A value determination process is performed.

  In the set value determination process, as shown in FIG. 31, a set value determination process 1 (Sg51), a set value determination process 2 (Sg52), and a set value determination process 3 (Sg53) are sequentially executed.

  In the set value determination process 1 in the step of Sg51, as shown in FIG. 32, whether or not the value read from the set value work 1 is in the range of 1 to 6, that is, the set value used for the internal lottery of the current game is appropriate. It is determined whether or not the value is within the range (Sg61). If the value read from the set value work 1 is not within the range of 1 to 6, an error code indicating a RAM abnormality is stored in the register (Sg62). If the value read from the set value work 1 is a value in the range of 1 to 6, the process proceeds to the set value determination process 2 in step Sg52.

  In the set value determination process 2 in the step of Sg52, as shown in FIG. 33, whether or not the value read from the set value work 1 and the value read from the set value work 2 match, that is, the current game. It is determined whether or not the set value used for the internal lottery matches the set value set at the previous setting change (Sg71), and the value read from the set value work 1 and read from the set value work 2 If the values do not match, an error code indicating RAM abnormality is stored in the register (Sg72), the process proceeds to the error processing shown in FIG. 24, and the values read from the set value work 1 and read from the set value work 2 If the value matches, the process proceeds to the set value determination process 3 in step Sg53.

  In the set value determination process 3 in the step of Sg53, as shown in FIG. 34, whether or not the value read from the set value work 1 and the value read from the set value work 3 match, that is, the current game. It is determined whether or not the set value used for the internal lottery matches the set value used for the internal lottery of the previous game (Sg81), and the value read from the set value work 1 and read from the set value work 3 If the value does not match, an error code indicating a RAM abnormality is stored in the register (Sg82), the process proceeds to the error processing shown in FIG. 24, and the value read from the set value work 1 and the set value work 3 If the read value matches, the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG.

  As described above, in the setting value determination process, whether or not the setting value used for the internal lottery of the current game is within an appropriate range, whether the setting value used for the internal lottery of the current game and the previous setting change are set. By determining whether or not the set value matches the set value used for the internal lottery of the current game and the set value used for the internal lottery of the previous game, respectively. It is determined whether or not the set value used for the internal lottery of the game is an appropriate value, and if it is determined that the set value is not an appropriate value in at least one of the determinations, the above-described RAM abnormality error In the same manner as when the data in the RAM 41c is determined not to be normal at the time of startup, an error state due to a RAM abnormality error occurs, and the progress of the game is disabled. It has become as to be.

  In step Sg5, random number acquisition processing for acquiring a random number used in the game is performed, and the process proceeds to step Sg6. In the random number acquisition process, a sampling command is output to the sampling circuit 43, the random number generated by the random number generation circuit 42 is latched, and the latched random number value is input from the I / O port 41d and extracted. Then, a predetermined logical operation is performed on the extracted random number, and the result is obtained as a random number.

  In the step of Sg6, the state number (any one of 0 to 4) is stored in the RAM 41c according to the game state of the game, and the process proceeds to the step of Sg7. In the step of Sg7, in the gaming state indicated by the state number, the first combination number to be drawn is stored in the RAM 41c, and the process proceeds to the step of Sg8. In the step of Sg7, when the state number is 0 or 1, that is, when any special combination is not carried over in the normal gaming state, 1 (Big Bonus (1)) is first set as the combination number to be drawn. When the state number is 2 or 3, that is, when any special combination is carried over in the normal gaming state, 10 (replay) is first set as the combination number to be drawn, and the state number Is 4, that is, in the case of a regular bonus, 11 (cherry) is first set as a winning number to be drawn.

  In the step of Sg8, it is confirmed whether or not the lot number to be drawn is 15, that is, whether or not all the lots to be drawn are finished, and if it is 15, that is, all the lots to be drawn. If the lottery for the second part has been completed, the process proceeds to step Sg9. If not 15, the process proceeds to step Sg10.

  In step Sg9, the general combination storing work in which the general combination winning flag is stored in the RAM 41c is cleared, the internal lottery process is terminated, and the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG.

  In the step of Sg10, it is checked whether or not the common flag registered in the role-specific table of FIG. 4B is 1 in association with the role number to be processed. If not 1, the process proceeds to step Sg12.

  In step Sg11, the address (see FIG. 5) of the storage area for the number of determination values in the ROM 41b registered in the role-specific table in FIG. 4B in association with the role number to be processed is read. Then, the number of determination values stored at this address is acquired, and the process proceeds to step Sg13.

  In the step of Sg12, first, the setting value stored in the RAM 41c is read, and further, the ROM 41b registered in the role-specific table in FIG. 4B in association with the processing target role number and the read setting value. Read the address of the storage area for the number of judgment values. Then, the number of determination values stored at this address is acquired, and the process proceeds to step Sg13.

  In the step of Sg13, the number of determination values acquired in the step of Sg11 or Sg12 is added to the random number value for internal lottery, the result of addition is set as a new random number value, and the process proceeds to the step of Sg14, and the number of determination values is determined by internal lottery. It is determined whether an overflow has occurred when added to the random number value. The occurrence of overflow indicates that the winning combination corresponding to the winning combination number to be processed has been won. If an overflow occurs, the process proceeds to step Sg16. If no overflow has occurred, the process proceeds to step Sg15.

In step Sg15, 1 is added to the role number to be processed, and the process returns to step Sg8.
In the step of Sg16, it is confirmed whether or not the role number is 1 to 9, that is, a role number indicating a special role or a combination of roles including a special role. If the role number is 1 to 9, the step of Sg17 If the combination number is not 1 to 9, the process proceeds to step Sg18.

  In the step of Sg17, a special combination winning flag corresponding to the combination number to be processed is set in the special combination storing work in which the special combination winning flag is stored in the RAM 41c. In the step of Sg18, the general combination storing work of the RAM 41c is set. In addition, the winning flag of the general combination corresponding to the combination number to be processed is set, the internal lottery process is terminated, and the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG. In the step of Sg18, when the combination numbers are 1 to 3, since the general combination is not won, the general combination storing work in the RAM 41c is cleared in this case.

  FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the reel rotation process executed by the CPU 41a in step Sd3.

  In the reel rotation process, first, it is determined whether or not a wait time (about 4.1 seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed since the reel rotation start time of the previous game (Sh1), and the wait time has elapsed. If not, wait until the wait time elapses.

  If the wait time has elapsed in the step of Sh1, a wait time is newly set (Sh2).

  Next, the setting at the start of the rotation of the reel motor is performed, and the rotation of the reel is started (Sh3). Then, a stop control table corresponding to the game state of the game, the winning combination status of the game, and the stop status of other reels is created for each rotating reel (Sh4), and the setting at the time of completion of stop preparation is performed (Sh5). As a result, the stop operation can be validated, and then the stop operation becomes valid when a constant-speed rotation of the reel is detected in the processing at the time of passing through the origin of a timer interrupt process described later.

  Next, it is determined whether or not any one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is detected (Sh6). If any stop switch is not detected, a reel rotation error (a certain period or more) is detected. Then, it is determined whether or not an error determined when the reel reference position is not detected by the reel sensor 33 (Sh7). If no reel rotation error has occurred, an insertion error (medal insertion) is further performed. Whether or not a medal insertion was detected during a period other than the permitted period, and whether or not a payout error (medal payout was detected during a period other than the permitted period) Error) is determined (Sh8, Sh9), and any error occurs in the steps Sh7 to Sh9. Even if it is not determined, the flow returns to step Sh6.

  If it is determined that an insertion error has occurred in step Sh8, or if a payout error has been determined in step Sh9, an error code indicating the input / discharge error during reel rotation is set in the register (Sh10). ), And shifts to the error processing shown in FIG. 24 (Sh11). When the error is released, the process returns to the step of Sh6 again.

  If it is determined in step Sh7 that a reel rotation error has occurred, an error code indicating a reel rotation error is set in the register (Sh12), and the process proceeds to error processing shown in FIG. 24 (Sh13). Along with this, the rotation of the reels is also temporarily stopped. When the error is released, the process returns to the step of Sh3 again, and the reel rotation is resumed.

  If any stop switch operation is detected in step Sh6, the number of steps from the reel reference position at that time (the number of steps to be the stop operation position) in the reel motor corresponding to the stop switch is calculated. After acquiring and setting the work corresponding to the stop reel (Sh14), the process waits until the rotation of the reel corresponding to the stop operation stops (Sh15).

  Then, when the rotation of the reels corresponding to the stop operation is stopped, it is determined whether or not all the reels are stopped (Sh16). If all the reels are not stopped, the process returns to the step of Sh4, and all the reels are If it is stopped, the reel rotation process is terminated and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG.

  As described above, in the reel rotation processing, after the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is started, the rotation of the reels for which the stop operation has not been detected is continued until the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is detected. Then, on the condition that the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is detected, control for stopping the display result on the corresponding reel is performed. Even if the reel rotation temporarily stops due to the occurrence of a reel rotation error, the stop operation is still detected until the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is detected after the reel rotation is restarted. Control is performed to stop the display result of the corresponding reels on the condition that the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is detected by continuing the rotation of the reels that have not been operated.

  FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the winning determination process executed by the CPU 41a in step Sd4.

  The winning determination process in the present embodiment mainly includes three processes. The first process is a process of setting a winning symbol flag based on the display result of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R derived and displayed in the game. The second process is a process for determining an abnormal winning based on the internal winning flag and the winning symbol flag. The third process is a process at the time of winning based on the winning symbol flag.

  The step of Sj1 is a process of setting a winning symbol flag based on the display result of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R derived and displayed in the game.

  The CPU 41a first performs a winning symbol determination process (Sj1), and proceeds to step Sj2. In the winning symbol determination process, the upper 8 bits of the winning symbol flag are stored in the B register, and the lower eight bits of the winning symbol flag are stored in the C register. The E register stores the number of payout medals.

  As described above, in step Sj1, the upper 8 bits of the winning symbol flag are stored in the B register, and the lower 8 bits of the winning symbol flag are stored in the C register.

  The subsequent steps Sj2 to Sj10 and Sj17 are processes for determining an abnormal winning based on the internal winning flag and the winning symbol flag.

  In step Sj2, the value of the internal winning flag storage work (iwin_flag) (internal winning flag) is stored in the HL register, and in step Sj3, the lower 8 bits of the internal winning flag as the value of the L register are stored in the A register. Store and proceed to step Sj4 to invert all bits of the A register. That is, each bit is inverted to 1 if it is 0, and is converted to 0 if it is 1, and converted to an abnormal winning determination flag, and the process proceeds to step Sj5.

  In the step of Sj5, the lower 8 bits of the winning symbol flag which is the value of the C register and the logical product (AND) of the value of the A register are calculated, the result is stored in the A register, and the process proceeds to the step of Sj6. If the A register is not 0, the process jumps to step Sj17, and if it is 0, the process proceeds to step Sj7.

  In step Sj7, the upper 8 bits of the internal winning flag, which is the value of the H register, are stored in the A register, and the process proceeds to step Sj8 to invert all the bits in the A register. That is, each bit is inverted to 1 if it is 0, and is converted to 0 if it is 1 and converted into an abnormal winning determination flag, and the process proceeds to step Sj9.

  In the step of Sj9, the logical product (AND) of the upper 8 bits of the winning symbol flag which is the value of the B register and the value of the A register is calculated, the result is stored in the A register, and the process proceeds to the step of Sj10. If the A register is not 0, the process jumps to step Sj17, and if it is 0, the process proceeds to step Sj11.

  The step of Sj17 is a jump destination when it is determined in the steps of Sj6 and Sj10 that the A register is not 0, that is, when a prize other than the prize allowed in the game is won, and indicates an abnormal prize error. The error code is set in the register, and the process proceeds to error processing shown in FIG.

  As described above, the abnormal winning is determined based on the internal winning flag and the winning symbol flag by the steps Sj2 to Sj10 and Sj17.

  The subsequent steps Sj11 to Sj18 (excluding Sj17) are processes at the time of winning based on the winning symbol flag.

  In the step of Sj11, the lower 8 bits of the winning symbol flag that is the value of the C register is stored in the A register, and the process proceeds to the step of Sj12, and the upper 8 bits of the winning symbol flag that is the value of the B register and the A register The logical sum (OR) of the values is calculated, the result is stored in the A register, and the process proceeds to step Sj13.

  In step Sj13, it is determined whether the A register is 0. If it is 0, that is, if no winning combination has been won, the process is terminated. If the winning combination is won, the process proceeds to step Sj14.

  In step Sj14, the lower 8 bits of the winning symbol flag which is the value of the C register is inspected for the bit (sixth bit) corresponding to replay, and when the value is 0, that is, other than replay When the winning combination is won, 1 is set to the zero flag, and when the value is 1, that is, when the replay is won, 0 is set to the zero flag. The process proceeds to step Sj15 to determine whether the zero flag is 1. If it is 1, the process jumps to step Sj18, and if not, the process proceeds to step Sj16.

  In step Sj16, a process when a replay is won, such as setting a flag during replay game indicating a replay game, is performed, and the process ends.

  The step of Sj18 is a jump destination when it is confirmed in the step of Sj15 that a winning combination other than replay has been won, and a process at the time of winning that is performed when a winning combination other than replay such as calculation of the number of payouts is performed Then, the process ends.

  As described above, according to the steps Sj2 to Sj10 and Sj17, the process at the time of winning based on the winning symbol flag is performed.

  FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the winning process executed by the CPU 41a in step Sj18.

  In the winning process, first, referring to the role-specific table shown in FIG. 4B, the game state (state number) of the game and the number of medals to be paid out corresponding to the character indicated by the winning symbol flag are set (Sj21). , Go to step Sj22.

  In step Sj22, it is determined whether or not the big bonus (1) has been won based on the winning symbol flag. If the big bonus (1) has not been won, the process proceeds to step Sj25. If the big bonus (1) has won, the big bonus (1) flag indicating that the big bonus (1) is in the RAM 41c is set, and the special role storing work (iwin_bonus) in the RAM 41c is cleared (00H is stored). (Sj23), the process proceeds to step Sj24, and the value of the big bonus medium payout counter in which the total payout number of medals in the big bonus is stored in the RAM 41c is initialized (set to 0) (Sj24). Proceed to

  If the big bonus (1) has not been won in step Sj22, it is determined whether or not the big bonus (2) has been won based on the winning symbol flag (Sj25), and the big bonus (2) has been won. If not, the process proceeds to step Sj27. If the big bonus (2) has won, the big bonus (2) flag indicating that the big bonus (2) is in the RAM 41c is set, and the special role storing work (iwin_bonus) in the RAM 41c is cleared (00H is stored) (Sj26), the process proceeds to the step Sj24, and the value of the big bonus medium payout counter in which the total payout number of medals in the big bonus is stored in the RAM 41c is initialized (set to 0) (Sj24), and the step of Sj27 Proceed to

  In step Sj27, it is determined whether or not the regular bonus has been won based on the winning symbol flag. If the regular bonus has not been won in step Sj27, the winning process is terminated and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG. If the regular bonus is won in step Sj27, a regular bonus medium flag indicating that the regular bonus is in progress is set in the RAM 41c, and the special role storing work (iwin_bonus) in the RAM 41c is cleared (00H is stored) (Sj28). After the value of the regular bonus game number counter and the value of the regular bonus winning counter in which the number of winnings in the regular bonus is stored are initialized (Sj29), the winning process is terminated and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG. .

  FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the control details of the game end process executed by the CPU 41a in step Sd6.

  In the game end process, first, it is determined whether or not a regular bonus is in progress, that is, whether or not a regular bonus game is in progress (except for a game that has won a regular bonus) (Sk1). Specifically, when the regular bonus flag is set in the RAM 41c and the RB signal is ON, it is determined that the regular bonus is being performed, and the regular bonus flag is not set in the RAM 41c. When the RB signal is OFF, or when the regular bonus flag is set in the RAM 41c and the RB signal is OFF (game with regular bonus winning), it is determined that the regular bonus is not in effect. To do.

  If the regular bonus is not in the step of Sk1, the process proceeds to the step of Sk5. If the regular bonus is in progress, the value of the regular bonus game number counter is decremented by 1. If a winning has occurred, the regular bonus medium winning counter is set. The value is incremented by 1 (Sk2), and it is determined whether or not the regular bonus end condition is satisfied, that is, whether or not the value of the regular bonus game number counter is 0 or the value of the regular bonus intermediate winning counter is 8. (Sk3). If the regular bonus end condition is not satisfied in the step Sk3, the process proceeds to the step Sk5. If the regular bonus end condition is satisfied, the regular bonus medium flag set in the RAM 41c is cleared (Sk4). ), Go to step Sk5.

  In step Sk5, it is determined whether the big bonus (1) flag or the big bonus (2) flag is set in the RAM 41c. If neither the big bonus (1) medium flag nor the big bonus (2) medium flag is set in the step of Sk5, the process proceeds to the step of Sk15, and the big bonus (1) medium flag or the big bonus (2) medium flag is set. If so, the number of medals to be paid out for the game is added to the value of the big bonus medium payout counter (Sk6), and the process proceeds to Step Sk7.

  In the step of Sk7, it is determined whether or not the value of the big bonus medium payout counter updated in the step of Sk6 exceeds 300, that is, whether the end condition of the big bonus (2) is satisfied. If it does not exceed 300, that is, if the end condition for the big bonus (2) is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step Sk12 because the end condition for the big bonus (1) is not satisfied. If the value of the big bonus medium payout counter exceeds 300 in the step of Sk7, whether or not the big bonus (2) medium flag is set in the RAM 41c, that is, the game is in the big bonus (2) state. It is determined whether or not the game is a game (Sk8), and if it is determined that the big bonus (2) medium flag is set, the process proceeds to step Sk11, and the big bonus (2) set in the RAM 41c is determined. The flag and the regular bonus medium flag are cleared, and the process proceeds to step Sk15. If it is determined in the Sk8 step that the big bonus (2) medium flag is not set, that is, the big bonus (1) medium flag is set, the big bonus updated in the Sk6 step is updated. It is determined whether or not the value of the medium payout counter exceeds 465, that is, whether or not the big bonus (1) end condition is satisfied (Sk9).

  In the step of Sk9, if the value of the big bonus medium payout counter does not exceed 465, that is, if the big bonus (1) end condition is not satisfied, the process proceeds to the step of Sk12 and the big bonus medium payout counter If the value of BB exceeds 465, that is, if the big bonus (1) end condition is satisfied, a big bonus (1) end flag indicating that the big bonus (1) end condition is satisfied is set. After that (Sk10), the big bonus (1) medium flag and the regular bonus medium flag set in the RAM 41c are cleared (Sk11), and the process proceeds to Step Sk15.

  In step Sk12, it is determined whether or not the regular bonus flag is not set in the RAM 41c, that is, whether or not the big bonus is in effect and the regular bonus is not activated. If the regular bonus medium flag is set in the step of Sk12, the process proceeds to the step of Sk15. If the regular bonus medium flag is not set in the step of Sk12, the regular bonus medium indicating that the regular bonus is in progress. A regular bonus operation start flag indicating the start of the operation of the flag and the regular bonus is set in the RAM 41c (Sk13), and the value of the regular bonus game number counter and the value of the regular bonus intermediate winning counter in which the number of winnings in the regular bonus is stored are initialized. (Sk14), the process proceeds to step Sk15.

  In step Sk15, it is determined whether or not the RB signal in the external output signal is ON. If the RB signal is not ON in step Sk15, the process proceeds to step Sk19. If the RB signal is ON, it is determined whether or not the regular bonus flag is set in the RAM 41c (Sk16). ). When the regular bonus flag is not set in the step of Sk16, that is, when the regular bonus is finished and the regular bonus is not resumed thereafter, the process proceeds to the step of Sk18. If the regular bonus medium flag is set in the step of Sk16, it is determined whether or not the regular bonus operation start flag is set in the RAM 41c (Sk17). When the regular bonus operation start flag is set in the step of Sk17, that is, when the regular bonus is reactivated during the big bonus, the process proceeds to the step of Sk18, and the regular bonus operation start flag is set in the step of Sk17. If not, that is, if the regular bonus is not satisfied and the termination condition for the regular bonus is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step Sk19. In step Sk18, the RB signal is turned off and the process proceeds to step Sk19.

  In step Sk19, it is determined whether a regular bonus operation start flag is set in the RAM 41c. If the regular bonus operation start flag is not set in step Sk19, the process proceeds to step Sk22. If the regular bonus operation start flag is set in step Sk19, that is, if the regular bonus starts from the next game, Then, the regular bonus operation start flag in the RAM 41c is cleared (Sk20), and the process waits until the output waiting time of the RB signal is elapsed (Sk21). When the output waiting time elapses, the process proceeds to Step Sk22.

  In step Sk22, it is determined whether the big bonus (1) flag or the big bonus (2) flag is set in the RAM 41c. If the big bonus (1) medium flag or the big bonus (2) medium flag is not set in the step of Sk22, the process proceeds to the step of Sk28, and in the step of Sk22, the big bonus (1) medium flag or the big bonus (2) medium If the flag is set, it is determined whether or not the BB signal is turned ON among the external output signals (Sk23). When the BB medium signal is ON in the step of Sk23, that is, when the big bonus is being performed and the next game is not the start game of the big bonus, the process proceeds to the step of Sk28, and the BB is being performed in the step of Sk23. When the signal is not ON, that is, when the big bonus starts from the next game, the BB medium signal is turned ON among the external output signals (Sk24), and the effect waiting time of the BB winning effect is stored in the register. After setting (Sk25) and enabling detection of the operation of the settlement switch 10 (Sk26), an effect waiting process for waiting until the effect waiting time set in the step of Sk25 elapses is performed (Sk27). And after completion | finish of an effect waiting process, it progresses to the step of Sk28.

  In the effect waiting process, as shown in FIG. 40, the effect waiting time set in the register is set in the general-purpose time counter of the RAM 41c (Sm1), and it is determined whether or not the operation of the settlement switch 10 is detected (Sm2). If the operation of the settlement switch 10 is not detected, the process proceeds to step Sm4. If the operation of the settlement switch 10 is detected, the settlement process shown in FIG. 29 is performed (Sm3), and then the process proceeds to step Sm4. . In step Sm3, it is determined whether or not the production waiting time set in the general-purpose time counter has elapsed. If the production waiting time has not elapsed, the process returns to step Sm2, and if the production waiting time has elapsed. Then, the production waiting process is terminated and the process returns to the original process.

  In step Sk28, it is determined whether the regular bonus flag is set in the RAM 41c. If the regular bonus medium flag is not set in the step of Sk28, the process proceeds to the step of Sk31. If the regular bonus medium flag is set in the step of Sk28, whether the RB signal in the external output signal is ON or not. Is determined (Sk29). When the RB signal is ON in the step of Sk29, that is, when the regular bonus is being performed and the next game is not the start game of the regular bonus, the process proceeds to the step of Sk31 and the RB is being processed in the step of Sk29. If the signal is not ON, that is, if the regular bonus starts from the next game, the RB signal is turned ON among the external output signals (Sk30), and the process proceeds to step S31.

  In the step of Sk31, it is determined whether or not the BB signal among the external output signals is ON. If the BB signal is not ON in the step of Sk31, the process proceeds to the step of Sk51. If the BB signal is ON in the step of Sk31, the big bonus (1) flag or big bonus (2 ) It is determined whether the medium flag is set (Sk32). If the big bonus (1) medium flag or the big bonus (2) medium flag is set in the step of Sk32, that is, if the big bonus does not end, the process proceeds to the step of Sk51, and the big bonus ( 1) When the medium flag or the big bonus (2) The medium flag is not set, that is, when the big bonus is ended, the BB medium signal of the external output signals is turned off (Sk33), and the ending effect is produced. The waiting time is set in the register (Sk34), the detection of the operation of the checkout switch 10 is validated (Sk35), and then waiting for the effect waiting until the effect waiting time set in the step of Sk34 elapses (see FIG. 40). ) Is performed (Sk36). After completion of the effect waiting process in the step of Sk36, initialization 2 is performed to initialize the general work in addition to the unused area and the unused stack area of the RAM 41c (Sk37), and then the process proceeds to the step of Sk38.

  In the step of Sk38, it is determined whether or not the automatic settlement function is set to be valid. If the automatic settlement function is disabled in the step of Sk38, the process proceeds to the step of Sk41. If the automatic settlement function is enabled in the step of Sk38, the big bonus (1) end flag is set in the RAM 41c. Whether or not the big bonus (1) ending condition is satisfied (Sk39). If the big bonus (1) ending flag is not set, the process proceeds to the step of Sk41 and the big bonus (1) 1) If the end flag is set, after the settlement process shown in FIG. 29 is performed (Sk40), the process proceeds to step Sk41.

  In step Sk41, it is determined whether or not the stop function is set to be valid. If the stop function is set to be invalid in the step of Sk41, the process proceeds to step Sk51. If the stop function is set to be valid in the step of Sk41, a big bonus (1) end flag is set in the RAM 41c. It is determined whether or not the game is satisfied, that is, whether or not the big bonus (1) end condition is satisfied (Sk42). If the big bonus (1) end flag is not set in the step of Sk42, the process proceeds to the step of Sk51. If the big bonus (1) end flag is set, the stop code indicating the stop state is stored in the register. The game is set (Sk43), and the stop code stored in the register is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 (Sk44). Then, it is determined whether or not the operation of the reset / setting switch 38 is detected (Sk45). If the operation of the reset / setting switch 38 is not detected, whether or not the operation of the reset switch 23 is further detected. (Sk46), if the operation of the reset switch 23 is not detected, it is further determined whether the operation of the settlement switch 10 is detected (Sk47), and if the operation of the settlement switch 10 is not detected. Return to the step of Sk45. When the operation of the reset / setting switch 38 is detected in the step of Sk45, when the operation of the reset switch 23 is detected in the step of Sk46, the operation proceeds to the step of Sk49, and the operation of the settlement switch 10 is performed in the step of Sk47. If detected, the settlement process shown in FIG. 29 is performed (S48), and the process returns to the Sk43 step.

  In step Sk49, the stop code stored in the register is cleared. Then, the display state of the game auxiliary display 12 is cleared (Sk50), the big bonus (1) end flag is cleared (Sk51), and the process proceeds to Step S52.

  In step Sk52, initialization 4 for initializing the unused area and the unused stack area of the RAM 41c is performed, and then the process at the end of the game is terminated, and the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG.

  As described above, in the process at the end of the game, it is determined for each game whether the regular bonus is not activated during the big bonus, and if the regular bonus is not activated during the big bonus, the regular bonus is activated. It is supposed to let you.

  In addition, it is determined whether or not the big bonus end condition is satisfied before determining whether the regular bonus is not activated. If the big bonus end condition is not satisfied in the determination, the regular bonus is not determined. It is determined whether or not the bonus is inactive. When the bonus is inactive, the regular bonus is activated.

  Further, when the regular bonus is activated, the RB medium signal is stopped until the output waiting time of the RB signal indicating that the regular bonus is elapsed, and when the output waiting time has elapsed, Even if the regular bonus is activated continuously during the big bonus, the output of the RB signal stops, and when the output waiting time elapses in this state, the RB is started again. The signal output is resumed.

  In addition, during the period until the production waiting time of the BB winning effect and the ending effect elapses, the detection of the operation of the settlement switch 10 is validated. If the operation of the settlement switch 10 is detected during this period, the settlement of the credit is performed. Control will be performed. In addition, even when the operation of the settlement switch 10 is validated even in the stopped state, and the operation of the settlement switch 10 is detected during this period, the credit settlement control is performed.

  41 and 42 are flowcharts showing the control contents of the timer interrupt process (main) executed by the CPU 41a in response to the occurrence of the interrupt 3, that is, interrupting the start process or the game process at an interval of 0.56 ms. .

  In the timer interrupt process (main), interrupts are first prohibited (Sn1). That is, the execution of another interrupt process during the execution of the timer interrupt process (main) is prohibited. Then, the register in use is saved in the stack area (Sn2).

  Next, the branch counter for identifying the timer interrupt to be executed in the timer interrupt process (main) is advanced by 1 from the four types of timer interrupts 1 to 4 (Sn3). In the step of Sn3, 1 is added when the branch counter value is 0 to 2, and is updated to 0 when the counter value is 3. That is, the branch counter value loops in the order of 0 → 1 → 2 → 3 → 0... Each time the timer interrupt process (main) is executed.

  Next, the branch counter value is referenced to determine whether it is 2 or 3, that is, timer interrupt 3 or timer interrupt 4 (Sn4). If it is not timer interrupt 3 or timer interrupt 4, that is, timer interrupt In the case of 1 or timer interrupt 2, it is checked whether the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R are started or whether they are rotating at a constant speed, and whether the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R are started or are rotating at a constant speed. For example, the motor phase signal output process for outputting the phase signal data changed in the motor step process of Sn8 described later and the phase signal data changed in the final stop process of Sn23 described later is executed (Sn5).

  Next, referring to the counter value for branching, it is determined whether it is 1 or not, that is, timer interrupt 2 (Sn6). Reel start processing (Sn7) for controlling the step time interval when starting 32L, 32C, 32R, motor step processing (Sn8) for changing phase signal data of the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R, reel motors 32L, 32C After the stop of 32R, the motor phase signal standby process (Sn9) for changing the phase signal to one-phase excitation after a certain time has been sequentially executed, and then the register saved in the stack area in Sn2 is restored (Sn20). The interrupt prohibited in the step is permitted (Sn21), and the process returns to the state before the interrupt.

  Further, in the case of timer interrupt 2 in the step of Sn6, LED dynamic display processing (Sn10) for dynamically lighting various indicators, control signal output processing for outputting data such as lighting signals of various LEDs to the output port, etc. (Sn11), random number update processing for updating various software random numbers (Sn12), time counter update processing for updating various time counters (Sn13), and command transmission for transmitting commands stored in the command queue to the effect control board 90 After the processing (Sn14) and the external output signal update processing (Sn15) for updating the external output signal are sequentially executed, the register saved in the stack area in Sn2 is restored (Sn20), and the interrupt prohibited in the Sn1 step is permitted. (Sn21) and the process returns to the state before the interruption.

  If the timer interrupt 3 or the timer interrupt 4 is found in the step of Sn4, it is further determined by referring to the branch counter value whether it is 3 or not, that is, the timer interrupt 4 (Sn16). If it is not interrupt 4, that is, timer interrupt 3, port input processing (Sn17) for inputting detection data of various switches from the input port, passing through the origin of the rotating reels 2L, 2C, 2R (reel reference) (Passing position) is detected, the occurrence of a reel rotation error is detected, whether stop preparation is completed (stop preparation completion code is set), stop preparation is complete, and If it is rotating at high speed, the process at the time of passing through the origin (Sn18) that validates the operation of the stop switch corresponding to the reel being rotated, these various types based on the detection signals of various switches After sequentially executing the switch input determination process (Sn19) for determining whether or not the switch satisfies the detection condition, the register saved in the stack area in Sn2 is restored (Sn20), and the interrupts prohibited in the Sn1 step are restored. Permit (Sn21) and return to the process before interruption.

  If the timer interrupt is 4 in the step of Sn16, the stop stored in the work on the stop reel is stored when the stop operation position is stored in the work on the stop reel with the detection of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R. A stop switch process (Sn22) for calculating the stop position after determining the stop position from the operation position and counting the number of steps until the stop calculated in the stop switch process, and when it is time to stop A stop process (Sn23) for starting braking by two-phase excitation, and a final stop process (Sn24) for three-phase excitation after a certain time from the start of braking in the stop process are sequentially executed, and then retracted to the stack area in Sn2. Restore the register (Sn20), enable the interrupt that was prohibited in the Sn1 step (Sn21), Back sense.

  FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the stop switch process executed by the CPU 41a in the timer interrupt 4 of the timer interrupt process (main) described above.

  In the stop switch process, first, for all reels in the order of left, middle, and right, whether or not the stop operation position is set for the work of the corresponding reel, that is, the stop operation is detected or stopped by automatic stop. 42 is determined (Sp1, Sp2). If no stop operation has been detected for all reels or if no stop has been instructed, the stop switch process is terminated and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG.

  If a stop operation of any of the reels is detected in the step of Sp1, the process proceeds to the step of Sp3, the stop control table corresponding to the reel is referred, and the work corresponding to the stop reel is set. From the region number including the number of steps of the stop operation position, the region number serving as the stop position is specified, and the process proceeds to step Sp4.

  In the step of Sp4, the number of steps required from the current reel reference position to the stop position specified in the step of Sp3 is calculated, and after setting the calculated number of steps, the stop switch process is terminated. Returning to the flowchart of FIG.

  FIG. 44 shows the control contents of the power interruption processing executed when the CPU 41a interrupts and executes the activation processing and the game processing when the interruption 2 occurs, that is, when the voltage drop signal from the power interruption detection circuit 48 is input. It is a flowchart which shows.

  In the power interruption interruption process, first, interruption is prohibited (Sq1). That is, other interrupt processing is prohibited from being executed at the start of the power interruption interrupt processing. Next, all registers that may be in use are saved in the stack area (Sq2). Although the values of the I register and IY register described above are used, they are not saved here because the same fixed value is always set with the initialization at the time of startup.

  Next, the detection data of the voltage drop signal is acquired from the input port, and it is determined whether or not the voltage drop signal is input (Sq3). At this time, if the voltage drop signal is not input, the register saved in the stack area in Sq2 is restored (Sq4), the interrupt prohibited in the step of Sq1 is permitted (Sq5), and the process before the interrupt is performed. Return.

  If a voltage drop signal is input in step Sq3, destruction diagnosis data (5A (H) in this embodiment) is set (Sq6), and all output ports are initialized (Sq7). ). Next, RAM parity adjustment data is calculated and set so that the exclusive OR of all storage areas (including unused areas and unused stack areas) of the RAM 41c becomes 0 (Sq8), and access to the RAM 41c is performed. It is prohibited (Sq9).

  Then, except for the determination of whether or not the voltage drop signal is input (Sq10, Sq10 is the same processing as Sq3), the processing enters a loop processing in which no processing is performed. That is, when the voltage decreases as it is, the operation is stopped internally. Therefore, the CPU 41a reliably stops operation when the power is interrupted. Further, in this loop processing, when the voltage recovers and the voltage drop signal is not input, the above-described startup processing is executed, and if the RAM parity is 0 and the destructive diagnosis data is normal, the original processing is performed. It will return to.

  In this embodiment, after prohibiting access to the RAM 41c, the output state of the voltage drop signal is monitored, and when the voltage drop signal is not input, it is determined that the voltage is restored, and the process proceeds to the startup process. However, no processing is performed in the loop processing, and the voltage is recovered while the loop processing is being performed, and the process proceeds to the startup processing based on the input of the reset signal from the reset circuit 49. You may make it transfer.

  Next, various control contents executed by the CPU 91a of the sub-control unit 91 mounted on the effect control board 90 will be described based on the flowcharts of FIGS.

  When a reset signal is input from the reset circuit 95 to the sub control unit 91, the CPU 91a performs a start-up process (sub) shown in FIG.

  In the startup process (sub), after initialization of the built-in device, peripheral IC, interrupt mode, stack pointer, etc. (Ss1), access to the RAM 91c is permitted (Ss2). Then, the RAM parity of all the storage areas of the RAM 91c is calculated (Ss3), and it is determined whether or not the RAM parity is 0 (Ss4).

  If the data in the RAM 91c is normal, the RAM parity should be 0. If the RAM parity is 0 in the step of Ss4, the data stored in the RAM 91c is normal, and the process proceeds to the step of Ss5. The production state before power interruption is restored. In step Ss5, it is determined whether or not the BB winning effect or ending effect has been executed before the power interruption. If the BB winning effect or ending effect is being executed, the BB winning effect or ending effect is executed. Has reached the final stage (Ss6). If the final stage has been reached, a final-stage control pattern is set (Ss7), and then the liquid crystal display is set according to the set control pattern. The effect control process for controlling the various effect devices such as the device 51, the effect effect LED 52, the speakers 53 and 54, and the reel LED is executed (Ss9), the interruption is permitted (Ss10), and the process proceeds to the loop process.

  If the BB winning effect or ending effect has not been executed before the power interruption in step Ss5, or if the BB winning effect or ending effect has reached the final stage in step Ss6, After setting the last control pattern executed before disconnection (Ss8), the control of various effect devices such as the liquid crystal display 51, effect effect LED 52, speakers 53 and 54, and reel LED is performed according to the set control pattern. The effect control process to perform is performed (Ss9), interruption is permitted (Ss10), and it transfers to a loop process.

  If the RAM parity is not 0 in step Ss4, the data stored in the RAM 91c is not normal. After the RAM 91c is initialized (Ss11), the standby pattern is set as the control pattern (Ss12). In accordance with the set control pattern, an effect control process for controlling various effect devices such as the liquid crystal display 51, effect effect LED 52, speakers 53 and 54, and reel LED is executed (Ss9), and interruption is permitted (Ss10). ), Shift to loop processing.

  FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the timer interrupt process (sub) executed by the CPU 91a at intervals of 1.12 ms based on the count of the internal clock.

  In the timer interrupt process (sub), first, it is determined whether or not a command is stored in the buffer (St1). If no command is stored in the buffer, the process proceeds to step St6. If a command is stored in the buffer, the command is acquired from the buffer (St2), and the process proceeds to step St3.

  In the step of St3, when the received command is an internal winning command, the effect table stored in the ROM 91b is referred to, and an effect pattern is selected at a selection rate according to the result of the internal lottery indicated by the internal winning command, An effect pattern selection process for setting the selected effect pattern in the RAM 91c as the effect pattern of the game is executed, and the process proceeds to step St4.

  In step St4, processing corresponding to the received command is performed, and the control pattern table stored in the ROM 91b is referred to, and the effect pattern set in the RAM 91c and the control registered corresponding to the received command are stored. A control pattern setting process for reading the pattern and setting it in the RAM 91c is executed, and the process proceeds to step St5.

  In the step of St5, in accordance with the control pattern set in the step of St4, an effect control process for controlling various effect devices such as the liquid crystal display 51, the effect effect LED 52, the speakers 53 and 54, and the reel LED is executed. Proceed to step.

  In the step of St6, after updating the values of various counters such as the random number counter of the RAM 91c, the process proceeds to the step of St7, and it is confirmed whether or not the content of data backed up in the RAM 91c at the time of startup is normal. The RAM parity adjustment data is calculated and set so that the exclusive OR of all the storage areas of the RAM 91c becomes 0, so that the timer interrupt process (sub) is completed.

  That is, the CPU 91a does not set the RAM parity adjustment data when the power interruption is detected like the CPU 41a of the main control unit 41, but the RAM parity adjustment data for each timer interrupt process (sub) that is periodically executed. Even if the power is cut off, it is possible to determine whether or not the content of the data backed up in the RAM 91c at the time of recovery is normal.

  47 and 48 are flowcharts showing the control contents of the control pattern setting process executed by the CPU 91a in the step 4 of the timer interrupt process (sub).

  In the control pattern setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the received command is a setting start command (Sy1). If the received command is a setting start command, the in-setting notification pattern is set as a control pattern (Sy1), the control pattern setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG.

  If the received command is not a setting start command in step Sy1, it is determined whether the received command is an initialization command (Sy3). If the received command is an initialization command, all areas of the RAM 91c are initialized (Sy4), the above-mentioned standby pattern is set as a control pattern (Sy5), the control pattern setting process is terminated, Returning to the flowchart shown in FIG.

  If the received command is not an initialization command in step Sy3, it is determined whether the received command is a standby command (Sy6). If the received command is a standby command, the standby pattern is set as a control pattern (Sy7), the control pattern setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG.

  If it is determined in step Sy6 that the received command is not a standby command, it is determined whether the received command is a stop command (Sy8). If the received command is a stop command, it is further determined whether or not it is a stop command indicating the start (occurrence) of the stop state (Sy9), and if it is a stop command indicating the start of the stop state. Then, the stop notification pattern is set as a control pattern (Sy10), the control pattern setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG. On the other hand, if it is not a stop command indicating the start of the stop state, that is, if it is a stop command indicating the release of the stop state, the standby pattern is set as the control pattern (Sy7), and the control pattern setting process is terminated. Returning to the flowchart shown in FIG.

  In the step of Sy8, if the received command is not a stop command, it is determined whether or not the received command is an error command (Sy11). If the received command is an error command, it is further determined whether or not it is an error command indicating the occurrence of an error condition (Sy12). If the received command is an error command indicating the occurrence of an error condition, the currently set control pattern is determined. Are temporarily saved in the stack (Sy13), the error notification pattern is set as a control pattern (Sy14), the control pattern setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG. On the other hand, if it is not an error command indicating the occurrence of an error state, that is, if it is an error command indicating the release of the error state, the control pattern saved in the stack at the time of occurrence of the error, ie, Sy13 is set (Sy15). Then, the control pattern setting process ends, and the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG.

  If it is determined in step Sy11 that the received command is not an error command, it is determined whether the received command is a payout start command (Sy16). If the received command is a payout start command, the payout pattern is set as a sub-pattern (Sy17), the control pattern setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG. The sub-pattern is a control pattern that is set in an area different from the area in which the control pattern of the effect that is being executed is set, and is executed when the effect is executed in parallel with the control pattern of the effect that is being executed. It is a control pattern that is set separately from the control pattern for the production. That is, normally, when a new control pattern is set, the control pattern that was originally set is overwritten, whereas the control pattern is set as a sub-pattern, so that Patterns are set at the same time. For this reason, when the payout pattern is set as the sub-pattern in the step of Sy17, an effect based on the payout pattern is executed concurrently with the effect currently being executed.

  If it is determined in step Sy16 that the received command is not a payout start command, it is determined whether the received command is a payout end command (Sy18). If the received command is a payout end command, the payout pattern set as the sub-pattern is cleared (Sy19), the control pattern setting process is ended, and the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG. That is, in the step of Sy19, only the effect based on the payout pattern that has been executed in parallel ends, and only the effect that was originally executed continues.

  If it is determined in step Sy18 that the received command is not a payout end command, it is determined whether the received command is a winning determination command (Sy20). If the received command is a winning determination command, it is determined whether or not the winning determination command indicates a big bonus winning (Sy21). If the winning determination command indicates a big bonus winning, the BB winning pattern is set as a control pattern (Sy22), the control pattern setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG. On the other hand, if the prize determination command does not indicate a big bonus prize, it is further determined whether or not a prize other than the big bonus is indicated (Sy23). If the winning determination command indicates a winning other than the big bonus, it corresponds to the winning winning pattern among winning patterns for executing the winning effect in which a specific effect is executed when the winning occurs. The winning pattern to be set is set as a control pattern (Sy24), the control pattern setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG. If no winning other than the big bonus is shown in the Sy23 step, the process proceeds to the Sy29 step.

  If the command received in step Sy20 is not a winning determination command, it is determined whether the received command is a gaming state command (Sy25). If the received command is not a gaming state command, the process proceeds to step Sy29. If the received command is a gaming state command, the gaming state indicated by the gaming state command is set in the RAM 91c (Sy26), and based on the set gaming state. It is then determined whether or not the game is a game for which a big bonus end condition is satisfied (Sy27). Then, if the game satisfies the big bonus end condition, the ending pattern is set as a control pattern (Sy28), the control pattern setting process is ended, and the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG. If the game is not a game for which the big bonus ending condition is satisfied in step Sy27, the process proceeds to step Sy29.

  In step Sy29, the control pattern table stored in the ROM 91b is referred to, the effect pattern set in the RAM 91c and the control pattern registered corresponding to the received command are read and set, and the control pattern setting process is performed. To return to the flowchart shown in FIG.

  As described above, in the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, credits are awarded when the end of the game is determined in a game in which a big bonus winning (big bonus (1) winning or big bonus (2) winning) has occurred. After the game is over, the ban on the settlement is canceled, and credits (including medals used to set the bet amount are included) even during the period when the bet number setting is prohibited until the BB winning effect waiting time elapses after the game ends. ) Can be returned, so that the player's will is reflected as much as possible, and the medal for the credit stored as owned by the player can be received. . Thus, for example, in a game in which a big bonus prize is generated, before starting the big bonus game accompanying the occurrence of the big bonus prize, a part of the medal memorized as the credit is given as a prize (for example, a soft drink or a cigarette). Etc.), but it is possible to receive a medal return reflecting such a player's will.

  In addition, when a big bonus prize is generated, an effect at the time of the BB prize indicating that the big bonus prize has occurred is executed, so that the player's interest in shifting to the big bonus accompanying the occurrence of the big bonus prize is effective. Can be enhanced.

  In addition, in the game where the big bonus (1) or big bonus (2) end condition is satisfied, the prohibition of credit settlement is canceled when the end of the game is determined, and the ending effect waiting time elapses after the game ends. As long as possible, medals stored as credits (including medals used to set bets) can be returned even during periods when setting bets is prohibited. Reflecting the will of the player, the medal for the credit stored as owned by the player can be received. This makes it possible to receive a medal return reflecting the will of the player who wants to end the game immediately after the end of the big bonus.

  In addition, since the ending effect indicating that the big bonus has ended is executed at the end of the game for which the big bonus (1) or big bonus (2) end condition has been established, the end of the big bonus should be notified in an easy-to-understand manner. Can do.

  Of the big bonus (1) and the big bonus (2) having different big bonus end conditions, the big bonus (1 ) In other words, the big bonus (1) in which the number of medals that can be acquired during the big bonus is larger than the big bonus (2) that ends when the total number of payouts in the big bonus reaches 301 (first specified value) If the stop function is set to be valid for a game that has been completed, after the end of the game has been determined, the ending effect waiting time has elapsed, and then the store clerk performs a reset operation to release the stop state. Control is made in a so-called stop state where the setting of the bet amount is prohibited until the game is finished, and after the big bonus (2) game ends, the stop function is enabled. Even if it is, the game is not controlled so that the game in the slot machine can be separated and the game situation of the slot machine can be reliably managed at the game store without bothering the player. it can.

  Of the big bonus (1) and the big bonus (2) having different big bonus end conditions, the big bonus (1 ) That is, the big bonus (1) that can be obtained more during the big bonus than the big bonus (2) that ends when the total number of payouts in the big bonus reaches 301 (first specified value) If the automatic settlement function is enabled for a game that has been completed, credit settlement (so-called automatic settlement) is performed after the end of the ending effect waiting time after the end of the game is determined. After the bonus (2) game ends, credits will not be settled even if the automatic settlement function is enabled. The without troubling user, thereby providing a separator game in the slot machine, a game status of the slot machine can be reliably managed by the game arcade.

  Also, in a game in which the big bonus (1) end condition is satisfied, even when the end of the game is determined and then controlled to a stop state (stop switch 36; ON), when the end of the game is determined In the period when the ban on setting of bets is prohibited after the game is finished and the waiting time for the ending effect is over, after the waiting time for the ending production is over Even so, medal stored as credit (including medals used to set bets) can be returned, so that the player's will is reflected as much as possible. The medal for the credit memorized as a thing can be returned. This makes it possible to receive a medal return reflecting the will of the player who wants to end the game immediately after the end of the big bonus. In addition, since the number of bets cannot be set until the ending effect ends, the interest of the game is not impaired.

  Further, in the game where the big bonus (1) end condition is satisfied, when the automatic settlement function is set to be valid and the stop function is set to be invalid (automatic settlement switch 110; ON, stop switch 36; OFF), when the end of the game is determined, the prohibition of credit settlement is canceled, and when the game ends and the ending effect waiting time elapses, the credit based on the effective setting of the automatic settlement function is After the settlement of the credit, the prohibition of setting of the bet number is canceled after the credit is settled, and the setting of the bet number is permitted, that is, until the ending effect is finished and the credit is settled. Since the number of bets cannot be set, the interest of the game is not impaired. In addition, since the credit can be settled by operating the settlement switch 10 before the ending effect is finished, the intention of the player who wants to finish the game immediately after the end of the big bonus (1) is reflected. The credit can be settled.

  Further, in the game where the big bonus (1) end condition is satisfied, even when the automatic checkout function is set to be effective, the prohibition of the credit checkout is canceled when the end of the game is determined. When the credit settlement based on the valid detection of the settlement switch 10 is performed during the period until the ending presentation waiting time elapses, the time when the ending presentation waiting time elapses or the settlement switch 10 is valid. When the credit settlement based on the detection is completed, the credit is 0, and the credit settlement based on the effective setting of the automatic settlement function is not performed. Since the bet number can be set when the production is finished, the interest of the game is not impaired.

  Further, in a game where the big bonus (1) end condition is satisfied, when both the stop function and the automatic checkout function are set to be effective (stop switch 36; ON, automatic checkout switch 110; ON), When the end of the game is determined, the prohibition on credit settlement is lifted, and after the game is over and the ending effect waiting time has elapsed, the credit settlement is performed, and then a reset operation is performed by the store clerk. The setting of the number of bets is prohibited until the stop state is released, and after the Big Bonus (2) game is over, credits are settled even if both the stop function and the automatic checkout function are enabled. Since the game is not stopped, the game in the slot machine is given a break without bothering the player. The work situation, or the like can be reliably manage.

  Further, in a game in which the big bonus (1) end condition is satisfied, when both the stop function and the automatic checkout function are disabled (stop switch 36; OFF, automatic checkout switch 110; OFF), When the end of the game is determined, the prohibition of the credit settlement based on the effective detection of the settlement switch 10 is released, and the setting of the bet number is prohibited when the game ends and the ending effect waiting time elapses. Since the player's will is reflected as much as possible, the medal for the credit stored as owned by the player can be received.

  In a game in which the big bonus (2) end condition is satisfied, the settlement switch 10 is activated when the end of the game is determined regardless of whether the stop function and the automatic settlement function are enabled / disabled. The prohibition of credit settlement based on the detection is canceled, and the setting of the bet number is canceled when the game ends and the ending effect waiting time has elapsed, so the player's will is reflected as much as possible Then, the medal for the credit stored as owned by the player can be received.

  In addition, after a determination is made that the game in which the big bonus prize has occurred is terminated, a power interruption occurs in the period until the BB prize presentation effect waiting time elapses. When the time excluding the time already passed before the power interruption has elapsed from the production waiting time, the prohibition on the setting of the bet number is canceled and the setting of the bet number is permitted, whereas the BB prize is won. When power interruption occurs in the stage before the time effect reaches the final stage, and then returns, the BB winning effect is executed from the beginning of the elapsed stage. When the bet amount is set and the BET command is received from the main control unit 41 side, the BB winning effect is canceled at that time, and the effect corresponding to the BET command is executed. For this reason, after the start of the BB winning effect, the power is cut off before the end of the BB winning effect, and after that, the BB winning effect is executed from the beginning. When a new command is received during execution of the time effect, the current BB winning effect is canceled and the effect based on the newly received command is executed, so the BB winning effect is troublesome for the player. The control state on the sub-control unit 91 side is stagnant in spite of the fact that the control state on the main control unit 41 side is progressing, and there is a discrepancy between both control states. Can be prevented.

  In addition, the sub-control unit 91 backs up whether the BB winning effect being executed at the time of power interruption is in the elapsed stage or the final stage, and backs up that the BB winning effect is in the elapsed stage at the next activation. If so, the BB winning effect is executed from the beginning of the progress stage, and if the fact that the BB winning effect is in the final stage is backed up, the BB winning effect is returned to the final stage state. Yes. For this reason, when power interruption occurs in a state where the BB winning effect has reached the final stage, the BB winning effect that has been executed is not executed from the beginning after the return, so the BB winning effect is performed. Can be more effectively prevented from becoming annoying for the player.

  Also, for example, during the period from the determination of the end of the game in which the big bonus winning has occurred until the production waiting time of the production at the BB winning has passed, credit settlement is executed, and medals are being paid out along with this settlement. If a payout error occurs and the payout error is canceled, the bet number is set when the time excluding the time already passed before the payout error has elapsed from the production waiting time of the BB winning effect. When the prohibition is canceled and the setting of the number of bets is permitted, a payout error occurs in the stage before the BB winning performance reaches the final stage, and the payout error is canceled. The BB winning effect is executed from the beginning of the elapsed stage. When the bet amount is set and the BET command is received from the main control unit 41 side, the BB winning effect is canceled at that time, and the effect corresponding to the BET command is executed. For this reason, after the BB winning effect is started, the error state is controlled before the BB winning effect is finished, and when the error state is canceled after that, the BB winning effect is executed from the beginning. If a new command is received during the execution of the BB winning effect, the effect based on the newly received command is executed after the BB winning effect being executed is cancelled, and the BB winning effect is displayed by the player. Can be prevented, and the control state on the sub-control unit 91 side is stagnant despite the progress of the control state on the main control unit 41 side, and there is a discrepancy between the two control states. It can be prevented from occurring.

  Further, the sub-control unit 91 maintains data indicating whether the BB winning effect being executed at the time of an error is in the elapsed stage or the final stage, and when the error is canceled, the BB winning effect is in the elapsed stage. If data to that effect is maintained, the BB winning effect is executed from the beginning of the progress stage, and if the data indicating that the BB winning effect is in the final stage is maintained, the BB winning effect is the final stage. It comes to return in the state of. For this reason, if an error occurs in the state where the BB winning effect has reached the final stage, the BB winning effect that has been executed will not be executed from the beginning after the error is canceled. It is possible to more effectively prevent the BB winning effect from becoming troublesome for the player.

  In addition, when the stop function is set to be invalid, the waiting time for the ending effect elapses after it is determined that the game with the big bonus (1) or the big bonus (2) ending condition is satisfied. If a power outage occurs in the period up to and then returns, the prohibition of setting the bet number will be canceled when the time excluding the time already passed before the power interruption has passed from the waiting time of the ending production In the case where the setting of the number of bets is permitted, if a power interruption occurs before the ending effect reaches the final stage and then returns, the ending effect is Is executed from. When the number of bets is set and a BET command is received from the main control unit 41 side, the ending effect is canceled at that time, and the effect corresponding to the BET command is executed. For this reason, when the ending effect is started and then interrupted before the end of the ending effect, and then returned from the power interruption, the ending effect is executed from the beginning. When the command is received, the ending effect being executed is canceled and the effect based on the newly received command is executed, so that the ending effect can be prevented from becoming annoying for the player, and the main Although the control state on the control unit 41 side is advanced, it is possible to prevent the control state on the sub-control unit 91 side from stagnating and causing a discrepancy between the two control states.

  Further, the sub-control unit 91 backs up whether the ending effect being executed at the time of power interruption is in the elapsed stage or the final stage, and if the fact that the ending effect is in the elapsed stage at the next start-up is backed up, If the ending effect is executed from the beginning of the progress stage and the fact that the ending effect is in the final stage is backed up, the ending effect is returned to the final stage. For this reason, if a power interruption occurs when the ending effect has reached the final stage, the ending effect that was being executed will not be executed from the beginning after the return, so the ending effect is troublesome for the player. Can be effectively prevented.

  In addition, when the stop function and the automatic payment function are disabled, after the end of the game in which the big bonus (1) or the big bonus (2) end condition is satisfied is determined, the ending effect is awaited. In the period until the time elapses, for example, when the payment of credit is executed, a payout error occurs during the payout of medals accompanying this checkout, and the payout error is canceled, When the time excluding the time already passed before the occurrence of the payout error has elapsed, the bet number setting is released and the bet number setting is permitted, whereas the ending effect is final. If a payout error occurs in the stage before reaching the stage, and the payout error is canceled, the ending effect is executed from the beginning of the elapsed stage.When the number of bets is set and a BET command is received from the main control unit 41 side, the ending effect is canceled at that time, and the effect corresponding to the BET command is executed. For this reason, after the ending effect is started, it is controlled to an error state before the ending effect ends, and when the error state is canceled after that, the ending effect is executed from the beginning. When a new command is received, the ending effect being executed is canceled and the effect based on the newly received command is executed, so that the ending effect can be prevented from becoming annoying for the player. Even though the control state on the main control unit 41 side is advanced, it is possible to prevent the control state on the sub control unit 91 side from stagnating and causing a discrepancy between the two control states.

  Further, the sub-control unit 91 maintains data indicating whether the BB winning effect being executed at the time of an error is in the elapsed stage or the final stage, and when the error is canceled, the BB winning effect is in the elapsed stage. If data to that effect is maintained, the BB winning effect is executed from the beginning of the progress stage, and if the data indicating that the BB winning effect is in the final stage is maintained, the BB winning effect is the final stage. It comes to return in the state of. For this reason, if an error occurs in the state where the BB winning effect has reached the final stage, the BB winning effect that has been executed will not be executed from the beginning after the error is canceled. It is possible to more effectively prevent the BB winning effect from becoming troublesome for the player.

  In addition, when the stop function is set to be effective, the power is interrupted during the period from when the end of the game for which the end condition of the big bonus (1) is satisfied to the end of the ending effect production waiting time. Occurs, and after that, after the time excluding the time that has already passed before the power interruption has elapsed from the waiting time of the ending effect (if the automatic checkout function is enabled, the ending effect After the credit settlement is completed after the time excluding the time already passed before power interruption has elapsed from the production waiting time, the reset switch 23 or the reset / setting switch 38 is operated, and the stop state is released. At the time, the prohibition on the setting of the bet number is also released, and the setting of the bet number is permitted, whereas in the stage before the ending effect reaches the final stage Disconnection occurs, when subsequently return, ending effect is performed from the initial course stages. For this reason, after the ending effect is started, the power is interrupted before the end of the ending effect, and then the ending effect is executed from the beginning when the power is restored from the power interruption. When the command indicating the start of the state is received, the running ending effect is canceled and the in-stop notification is executed, so that the ending effect can be prevented from becoming troublesome for the player, Although the control state on the main control unit 41 side is progressing, it is possible to prevent the control state on the sub control unit 91 side from stagnating and causing a discrepancy between the two control states.

  Further, when the stop function is set to be valid, after the end of the game for which the end condition of the big bonus (1) is determined and until the ending effect production waiting time elapses, for example, If a payout error occurs during the payment of a credit and a payout error occurs during the payout of the medal associated with this checkout, the time that has already elapsed before the payout error occurs from the waiting time for the ending production. When the reset switch 23 or the reset / setting switch 38 is operated after the time excluding lapse of time and the stop state is released, the prohibition of setting of the betting amount is also canceled and the setting of the betting amount is permitted. On the other hand, if a payout error occurs before the ending performance reaches the final stage and the payout error is canceled, Funding production is executed from the beginning of the elapsed stage. For this reason, after an ending effect is started, if an error occurs before the ending effect ends, and then the error is canceled, the ending effect is executed from the beginning. When a command indicating the start of the stop state is received, the running ending effect is canceled and the stop notification is executed, so that it is possible to prevent the ending effect from becoming annoying for the player. Even though the control state on the main control unit 41 side is advanced, it is possible to prevent the control state on the sub control unit 91 side from stagnating and causing a discrepancy between the two control states.

  In addition, the time required to execute the progress stage of the BB winning effect and the ending effect, that is, the time until the transition to the final stage is determined as the waiting time for the BB winning effect and the ending effect, that is, the end of the game. Since the set time is shorter than the time when the setting of the bet number is prohibited, the BB winning that was executed after returning to the final stage of the BB winning effect and the ending effect was cut off. Even when the time effect and the ending effect are executed from the beginning, the overlapping period between the period when the BB winning effect and the ending effect are executed and the period until the prohibition of the setting of the bet number is canceled, It is possible to prevent the discrepancy between the control states of both the main control unit 41 and the sub control unit 91 as much as possible.

  In this embodiment, an BB winning effect and an ending effect are produced while an error occurs and the error state is controlled before the BB winning effect and the ending effect waiting time elapses. The timing of the waiting time of the BB prize and the ending effect is resumed from the time when the waiting time is interrupted and the error state is canceled. The waiting time may be counted without interruption while being controlled to the error state. By doing so, the prohibition of setting the bet amount is released when the error state is canceled. In addition, it is possible to set the bet number at the earliest possible stage, and the bet number is set in this state, so that the resumption of the BB winning effect and the ending effect can be performed. Since the cancellation is not bothered by the player, the control state on the sub-control unit 91 side is stagnant despite the fact that the control state on the main control unit 41 side is advanced. It is possible to prevent a discrepancy in the control state.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the setting for determining whether or not the value read from the set value work 1 is in the range of 1 to 6, that is, whether or not the set value used for the internal lottery is in the proper range. If the value determination process 1 is executed for each game and the value read from the set value work 1 is not a value in the range of 1 to 6, it is controlled to an error state due to a RAM abnormality error, and the progress of the game is disabled. . In the present embodiment, the value stored in the set value work 1, that is, the range of the set value that can be selected by the setting change process is 1 to 6 values. If the value is not in the range of 6, the progress of the game is disabled.

  Furthermore, when the set bet number is a bet number corresponding to the gaming state, a process for determining whether or not the set bet number is not the bet number corresponding to the gaming state is executed for each game. Control of the error state due to the RAM abnormal error disables the progress of the game. In this embodiment, the number of bets corresponding to each gaming state is determined. However, when a game is played with a bet number different from the bet number, the data stored in the RAM 41c is broken. Since there is a possibility that an illegal program is operating or not, even if the set bet number is not the bet number according to the gaming state, the progress of the game is disabled.

  Then, once controlled to an error state due to a RAM abnormality error, the game cannot be progressed unless the setting change mode is entered and a setting value is newly selected and set based on the setting changing operation. Is not released. In other words, if the set value is not appropriate due to garbled data or an illegal program operation, or if the set bet number is not the bet number according to the gaming state, the set value automatically set by the slot machine Rather, the game is played based on the set value selected and set based on the setting change operation (generally, since the setting change operation is performed by an amusement store employee, the game store side selects the set value). This ensures that the game is fair.

  Further, in the present embodiment, whether the value read from the set value work 1 and the value read from the set value work 2 match, that is, the set value used for the internal lottery, and is set when the setting is changed. When the set value determination process 2 for determining whether or not the set value matches is executed for each game, the value read from the set value work 1 does not match the value read from the set value work 2 In addition, it is controlled to an error state due to an abnormal RAM error, and the progress of the game is disabled. In the present embodiment, the setting value after the change is stored in each of the setting value work 1 and the setting value work 2 when the setting is changed. Normally, the value stored in the setting value 1 and the setting value are set. The value stored in 2 should match, and if these values do not match, the setting value may have been rewritten illegally, and in this case, the progress of the game is disabled. It becomes.

  In addition, whether the value read from the set value work 1 and the value read from the set value work 3 match, that is, the set value used for the internal lottery of the current game and the internal lottery of the previous game. The set value determination process 3 for determining whether or not the set value matches is executed for each game, and the value read from the set value work 1 does not match the value read from the set value work 3 Even in this case, the game is controlled in an error state due to a RAM abnormality error, and the progress of the game is disabled. In the present embodiment, the set value used for the internal lottery is stored in the set value work 3, and is normally the value stored in the set value 1 (the set value used in the internal lottery of the current game). And the value stored in setting value 3 (the setting value used in the previous internal lottery of the game) should match, and if these values do not match, the setting value may have been rewritten illegally In this case, the progress of the game is disabled.

  And once it is controlled to the error state due to the RAM abnormality error by these determinations, the game cannot be progressed unless the setting change mode is entered and the setting value is newly selected / set based on the setting changing operation. The normalized state is not released. In other words, in order to restart the game when there is a possibility that the setting value has been illegally rewritten, it is necessary to perform a setting change operation that is more time-consuming than a reset operation for canceling the normal error state. Cheating can be effectively prevented.

  If there is a possibility that the setting value has been rewritten illegally, it is not the setting value automatically set by the slot machine, but the setting value selected and set based on the setting change operation (generally, Since the setting change operation is performed by a game store employee, it is ensured that the game is played based on the setting value selected by the game store side), so that the fairness of the game can be achieved.

  Further, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the unused area in the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41 is initialized for each game. It is possible to prevent the unauthorized program from being resident.

  In the present embodiment, since the unused stack area in the stack area is initialized for each game in addition to the unused area in the RAM 41c, all the unused areas in the RAM 41c at that time are stored for each game. Even if an attempt is made to store an illegal program using an unused stack area without using an unused area of the RAM 41c, there is no room for the illegal program to reside. As a result, it is possible to more reliably prevent unauthorized programs from being resident, and for example, by adding unauthorized data (such as addresses specified by unauthorized programs) to unused stack areas, the microcomputer malfunctions when data is restored. By rewriting the register to an illegal one by Program and can also be prevented illegal that would to perform the different operations. Further, by storing illegal data in the unused stack area, an area where the saved data should be stored can be compressed, the stack area overflows, and the micro that configures the main control unit 41 is stored. Problems such as the computer running away can be prevented.

  In this embodiment, the unused area and the unused stack area of the RAM 41c are initialized for each game. However, at least one of the unused area and the unused stack area of the RAM 41c is initialized for each game. Anything can be used as long as it initializes.

  Further, in this embodiment, by executing the initialization 4 for initializing the unused area and the unused stack area of the RAM 41c at the end of the game, the unused area and the unused stack area of the RAM 41c are changed for each game. If the unused area and / or the unused stack area of the RAM 41c is initialized at least once per game, the unused area and / or the unused stack area of the RAM 41c is initialized. The timing for initialization may be any timing during one game. For example, the unused area and / or the unused stack area of the RAM 41c at the time of starting a game or executing a process that is always executed for each game. Initialization may be performed.

  Also, before the start of setting (before the transition to the setting change mode), at the end of the big bonus, when the data in the RAM 41c is not destroyed at the time of activation, when the four initialization conditions at the end of one game are satisfied, Four types of initializations 1 to 4 having different regions to be initialized are performed according to each initialization condition, and any of these four types of initialization conditions is satisfied, and an unused region in the RAM 41c is always Since the unused stack area in the stack area is initialized, it is possible to more reliably prevent the illegal program from being resident.

  In particular, when the data in the RAM 41c is not destroyed at the time of startup, the unused area in the RAM 41c and the unused stack area in the stack area are always initialized. Therefore, the unused area and the unused stack area in the RAM 41c are used. Even when an unauthorized program or unauthorized data is stored, it is possible to prevent the control state of the main control unit 41 from returning based on the data in the RAM 41c while the unauthorized program or the unauthorized data is stored.

  In addition, in the power interruption interrupt processing, after destructive diagnosis data with any bit set to 1 is stored in a predetermined address of the RAM 41c, the RAM parity based on all data including the unused area and the unused stack area of the RAM 41c. RAM parity adjustment data is calculated and stored so that becomes 0, and RAM parity calculated based on data stored in all areas including the unused area and unused stack area in the RAM 41c at the time of restoration Whether or not destructive diagnosis data is stored, and if the RAM parity is not 0, or even if the RAM parity is 0, the destructive diagnosis data is stored normally. If not, an error occurs due to a RAM error, and the setting key switch 37 is turned on and the power is turned on. Since the game cannot proceed until initialization 1 is performed to initialize all the areas except the used stack area of the RAM 41c, an unused area and / or an unused stack area of the RAM 41c is activated. Even if a malicious program is stored in the computer, the malicious program can be found and initialized.

  Further, when it is determined that the data stored in the RAM 41c is not normal and a RAM abnormal error state occurs, initialization 1 for initializing all areas except the used stack area of the RAM 41c is performed. Even when it is determined that the data stored in the RAM 41c is not normal, and when the setting key switch 37 is turned on after that, all the areas except the in-use stack area of the RAM 41c. Since initialization 1 for initializing is performed, a malicious program that may be stored in the RAM 41c can be surely removed.

  Further, in this embodiment, when an abnormality occurs in the data stored in the RAM 41c, the error state due to the RAM abnormality error is controlled, the progress of the game is disabled, and the error due to the RAM abnormality error once. When the state is controlled, the state is changed to the setting change mode, and the state in which the progress of the game is disabled is not released unless a setting value is newly selected and set based on the setting change operation. That is, even if an abnormality occurs in the data stored in the RAM 41c, it is not the setting value automatically set by the slot machine, but the setting value selected and set based on the setting change operation (generally, the setting change Since the operation is performed by a game shop employee, it is ensured that the game is played based on the setting value selected by the game shop), so that the fairness of the game can be achieved.

  Further, the data stored in the RAM 41c is abnormal in most cases when the control cannot be continued due to a malfunction such as a power failure or the CPU 41a running out of control. For this reason, in the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the data is normal only when the CPU 41a is activated after recovering from these states. Therefore, whether or not the data stored in the RAM 41c is normal. This determination can be made only in a situation where there is a high possibility that an abnormality has occurred in the data. That is, in a situation where there is a low possibility that an abnormality has occurred in the data, it is not necessary to perform the determination, and the load on the CPU 41a can be reduced.

  In this embodiment, the RAM parity adjustment data is calculated and stored so that the RAM parity based on all the data in the RAM 41c in the power interruption processing, that is, the result of the exclusive OR operation is 0, and stored. Since it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 41c is normal by determining whether or not the RAM parity calculated based on the data stored in all areas in the RAM 41c at the time of recovery is 0, the determination Can be performed accurately and conveniently.

  In the present embodiment, in the power interruption interrupt processing, destruction diagnosis data (5AH in this embodiment) in which any bit is 1, that is, specific data other than 0 is stored in a predetermined address of the RAM 41c. Is stored in the RAM 41c, the adjustment data for which the RAM parity is zero based on all the data of the RAM 41c including the destructive diagnosis data is stored. Whether the data in the RAM 41c is normal on the condition that the RAM parity is 0 and the destructive diagnosis data is also normally stored. The control state is restored based on the data stored in the RAM 41c. As a result, when 00H is stored in all areas, that is, when the data in the RAM 41c is cleared to 0 even if the data in the RAM 41c is not normal, it is normal by the determination of the RAM parity at startup. If the data in the RAM 41c is cleared to 0, the area in which the destructive diagnosis data is to be stored is also 0, and it is determined that the data in the RAM 41c is not normal. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the accuracy of determining whether or not the data in the RAM 41c has the correct contents at the time of activation.

  Further, when the CPU 41a determines that the RAM parity is 0 at startup and the data for destructive diagnosis is also normally stored, and determines that the data in the RAM 41c is normal, the destructive diagnosis stored in the RAM 41c. Since the data for destruction diagnosis is still stored in the RAM 41c even after the activation, the data in the RAM 41c is not normal at the next activation, but the data is destroyed. Since diagnostic data is stored, it is possible to prevent erroneous determination as normal.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when an abnormality occurs in the data in the RAM 41c and the progress of the game is disabled, a setting value changing operation as a condition for releasing the disabled progress of the game is performed. As all the areas except the used stack area of the RAM 41c are initialized in accordance with the transition to the valid setting change mode (setting change process), the data in the RAM 41c due to the occurrence of an abnormality Initialization and data initialization associated with selection / setting of set values can be performed at once, and unnecessary processing can be omitted. Further, when the CPU 41a is activated, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 37 is in an ON state before determining whether or not the data in the RAM 41c is normal. At that time, the setting key switch 37 is in an ON state. If it is determined that there is, the determination as to whether the data in the RAM 41c is normal is not performed, and the mode shifts to the setting change mode, and a new setting value is selected and set. It can be omitted.

  In the present embodiment, initialization 1 is performed to initialize all areas except the in-use stack area of the RAM 41c before shifting to the setting change process. Initialization 1 may be performed. For example, the initialization 1 may be performed after the setting change process is completed, or may be performed when the setting value is determined in the setting change process. In this case, since the inconvenience arises when the determined set value is changed, in initialization 1, all areas except the used stack area and the set value work of the RAM 41c are initialized. Become.

  Further, in this embodiment, once the control is performed in the error state due to the RAM abnormality error, the game is disabled until the setting change process is performed. Then, initialization 1 is performed to initialize all areas except the used stack area of the RAM 41c, and the set value is set to an initial value (for example, set value 1). In this state, a reset operation is performed. The game may be restarted.

  In the present embodiment, the CPU 41a interrupts the process being executed by the voltage drop signal being input to the trigger terminal CLK / TRG and executes the power interruption process. In the interrupt process, a process for enabling determination of whether the data in the RAM 41c is normal at the time of restoration, such as a process for setting destruction diagnosis data or a process for calculating and setting RAM parity adjustment data, or an output port Before performing initialization or the like, it is determined whether or not a voltage drop signal is input to the signal input terminal DATA. If a voltage drop signal is also input to the signal input terminal DATA, the data in the RAM 41c is restored at the time of restoration. In contrast to performing processing for enabling determination as to whether it is normal, initialization of the output port, etc., if no voltage drop signal is input to the signal input terminal DATA, It is adapted to return to the processing of the.

  In other words, the voltage drop signal is input to the two systems of the input unit to the main control unit 41, and the CPU 41a can execute the power interruption interrupt process when the voltage drop signal is input to one of the input units. Before the process for enabling determination of whether the data in the RAM 41c is normal, the initialization of the output port, or the like is performed, it is determined again whether the voltage drop signal is input to the other input unit. These processes are executed only when a voltage drop signal is also input to the input section of this. When a power interruption is detected by mistake, whether or not the data in the RAM 41c is normal at the time of recovery is detected. Since it is possible to prevent the process for enabling the determination and the process such as the initialization of the output port from being performed, the control of the CPU 41a is interrupted for a longer time than necessary due to erroneous detection of power interruption. ,necessary Possible to prevent the load is applied to the top.

  In addition, other interrupts are prohibited during execution of power interruption interrupt processing and timer interrupt processing (main). For example, a voltage drop occurs during execution of timer interrupt processing (main). Even when a signal is input, double interruptions do not occur, and it is possible to prevent the processing load of the CPU 41a from increasing and data consistency from being lost. In particular, even if a voltage drop signal is input during the transmission of a command, no interruption occurs and the transmission of the command is not hindered, and the transmission can be completed normally before the CPU 41a stops driving. .

  If the interrupt timing of the power interruption interrupt processing and the interrupt timing of the timer interrupt processing (main) are simultaneous, that is, if interrupt 2 and interrupt 3 occur simultaneously, interrupt 2 Priority is given to the power interruption interrupt process, and if interrupt 2 occurs during the execution of the timer interrupt process (main), the power interruption occurs after the timer interrupt process (main) ends. Since interrupt processing is performed and power interruption interrupt processing is performed as early as possible while preventing multiple interrupts, power interruption interrupt processing is surely performed before the CPU 41a stops driving. Can be done.

  Further, the CPU 41a can execute four types of interrupts of interrupts 1 to 4, and when interrupts 1 and 4 that are set to unused are generated, the CPU 41a immediately returns to the original process. The unused interrupt processing to be executed is executed. For this reason, even when unused interrupts 1 and 4 occur, the process immediately returns to the process before the interrupt. Therefore, even if an unused interrupt occurs due to noise or the like, the CPU 41a runs out of control. It is possible to prevent such troubles.

  Further, in the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, a plurality of stops whose stop positions (display results) are uniquely determined with respect to the stop operation position (area assigned to the number of steps from the reel reference position). When all the reels are rotating among the control tables, a stop control table uniquely determined for the internal winning state for each gaming state is selected, and the reel stop control is performed according to the selected stop control table. When any of the reels is already stopped, a stop control table uniquely determined for the internal winning state for each gaming state and the stop position of the stopped reel is provided. The reel stop control is performed in accordance with the selected stop control table, and the gaming state, internal winning state, The reel stop control is performed based on the same stop control table, that is, the same control pattern, when all the stop states (and the stop positions (display results) of the stopped reels) satisfy the same condition. Therefore, as in the past, one stop control table is selected from a plurality of stop control tables for one internal winning state by a lottery different from the internal lottery (for example, a lottery for reel control). There is no need to make control, and the control when stopping the reel does not become complicated.

  Further, in the present embodiment, at the time of starting the rotation of the reels, for each reel, a stop control table uniquely determined for the internal winning state for each gaming state is selected, and the selected stop control table The reel stop control is performed according to the following, and each time the reel is stopped, for each spinning reel, the internal winning state for each gaming state, the stop position of the stopped reel, that is, any one reel is Select and select a stop control table that is uniquely defined for the combination of stop positions of the stopped reels when stopped, and a combination of stop positions of two stopped reels when any two reels are stopped The reel stop control is performed in accordance with the stop control table. When the reel stops, the reels that are rotating are selected in the internal winning state for each gaming state, the stop control table uniquely determined for the stopped position of the stopped reel, and the selected stop The reel stop control is performed according to the control table, and when one of the reels stops (when two reels stop), no new stop control table is selected and all the reels are rotating. The stop control of the remaining reels may be performed according to the stop control table selected when any one reel stops in the state.

  In addition, when any one of the reels is stopped, a stop control table that is uniquely determined with respect to the spinning reels, the internal winning state for each gaming state, and the stop position of the stopped reels. Select and perform reel stop control according to the selected stop control table, and when one of the reels stops (when two reels stop), the internal winning state for each of the gaming states, first A stop control table uniquely determined for the stop position of the stopped reel or the stop position of the last stopped reel may be selected, and the reel stop control may be performed according to the selected stop control table.

  In the present embodiment, when any of the reels is already stopped, the internal winning state for each game state, the stop state of the reel, and the stop position of the stopped reel are uniquely determined. The reel stop control is performed in accordance with the set stop control table. When any of the reels is already stopped, the internal winning state for each game state, the reel stop state, The reel stop control may be performed in accordance with a stop control table uniquely defined for the stop operation position of the stopped reel, so that the gaming state and the internal winning state are the same. Even if the stop position (stop symbol) of the stopped reel is the same, the stop operation position of the stopped reel is different. Because there may be different stop control table is applied, it can display the results of the reel it more versatile.

  Further, when any one of the reels stops, a stop control table that is uniquely determined with respect to the spinning reel, the internal winning state for each gaming state, and the stop operation position of the stopped reel. Is selected, and the reels are controlled to stop according to the selected stop control table. When one of the reels stops (when two reels stop), the stop control table is not newly selected and all The remaining reels may be stopped according to the stop control table selected when any one of the reels is stopped while the other reels are rotating.

  Further, when any one of the reels stops, a stop control table uniquely determined with respect to the spinning reel, the internal winning state for each gaming state, and the stop operation position of the stopped reel. Is selected, the reel stop control is performed according to the selected stop control table, and when one of the reels stops (when two reels stop), the internal winning state for each of the gaming states, first It is also possible to select a stop control table that is uniquely determined for the stop operation position of the reel that has stopped last or the reel that has stopped last, and to perform stop control of the reel according to the selected stop control table.

  Further, in this embodiment, when any two reels are stopped, with respect to the spinning reel, the combination of the internal winning state for each gaming state and the stop position of the stopped reel is uniquely determined. A predetermined stop control table is selected, and reel stop control is performed according to the selected stop control table. For example, when any two reels are stopped, Stop control table uniquely determined for the internal winning state for each of the gaming states, the stop position of any one of the stopped reels, and the stop operation position of the remaining reels of the stopped reels And stop control of the reels may be performed according to the selected stop control table.

  In addition, when any one reel is stopped, for the spinning reel, an internal winning state for each gaming state and a stop control table uniquely determined for the stopped position of the stopped reel are selected. When any two reels are stopped, a stop control table uniquely determined for the combination of the internal winning state for each gaming state and the stop operation position of the stopped reel is selected and selected. The reel stop control may be performed according to the stop control table.

  In addition, when any one reel is stopped, a stop control table that is uniquely determined with respect to the spinning reel, the internal winning state for each gaming state, and the stop operation position of the stopped reel. When any two reels are stopped, a stop control table uniquely determined for the combination of the internal winning state for each gaming state and the stop position of the stopped reel is selected and selected. The reel stop control may be performed according to the stop control table.

  In addition, when any one reel is stopped, a stop control table that is uniquely determined with respect to the spinning reel, the internal winning state for each gaming state, and the stop operation position of the stopped reel. When any two reels are stopped, the internal winning state for each gaming state, the stop position of any one of the stopped reels, the remaining reels of the stopped reels A stop control table uniquely determined for the stop operation position may be selected, and reel stop control may be performed according to the selected stop control table.

  Also, in these cases, the stop operation position of the reel that has been stopped is determined in an area in which the 1/2 symbol varies, that is, in a unit less than the range in which one symbol varies, and is unique to the stop operation position. The reel stop control is performed according to the stop control table that is determined in a specific manner, that is, different stop control tables can be selected for different number of steps within a range in which one symbol fluctuates from the number of steps at which a certain symbol is located at the reference position. In this way, even if the stop position of the stopped reel is the same and the timing at which the stop operation is performed is within the range where one symbol fluctuates, it is applied to other reels. Since the stop control table can be changed, the display results of each reel can be further diversified.

  Further, when any of the reels is already stopped, the stop control uniquely determined for the internal winning state, the reel stop state, and the stop operation position of the stopped reel for each gaming state. In the reel stop control according to the table, for example, in the case of not winning any combination in the normal gaming state (losing), within the range of the area number where the same stop position is determined in a specific reel. When the stop operation is performed, the same display result is derived. However, only when the stop operation is performed in the area of the specific area number among the area numbers where the same stop position is determined, the other reels are displayed. As the stop control table, select a stop control table that can derive the display result that constitutes the chance, and the same stop position is determined. A stop control table capable of deriving a display result that constitutes a chance as a stop control table of another reel when a stop operation is performed in an area other than a specific area number among the given area numbers It is preferable to select. As a result, even if the stop position of the reel at the time when the specific reel is stopped is the same, the stop operation position is different so that the chance is finally controlled so that it can be derived, and the control cannot be derived Therefore, it is possible to prevent the display result of the reel from becoming monotonous when none of the roles is won in the normal gaming state (losing).

  Furthermore, in this case, when any bonus is won in the normal gaming state, among the area numbers for which the same stop position is determined, compared to the case where no combination is won in the normal gaming state. For many area numbers, it is preferable to select a stop control table capable of deriving a display result that constitutes a chance as a stop control table for other reels. In the case where any bonus is won in the game, the chances are derived at a higher rate than in the case where none of the roles are won in the normal gaming state. It is possible to increase the player's expectation for winning the bonus.

  Further, when any of the reels is already stopped, stop control uniquely determined for the internal winning state, the reel stop state, and the stop operation position of the stopped reel for each gaming state When the reel stop control is performed according to the table, each time the reel is stopped, the reel to be stopped is either the left reel, the middle reel, or the right reel, the area number of the stop operation position of the corresponding reel, the corresponding It is preferable that a reel stop command capable of specifying the area number of the stop position of the reel to be transmitted is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91, so that the CPU 91 a of the sub-control unit 91 can stop the reel when it is stopped. In addition, it is possible to perform different effects depending on not only the stop position of the reel but also the stop operation position.

  In particular, when no combination is won in the normal gaming state (losing), the same indication is displayed when a stop operation is performed within the range of the area number where the same stop position is determined on a specific reel. The result is derived, but only when the stop operation is performed in the area of the specific area number among the area numbers where the same stop position is determined, the display that configures the chance as the stop control table of other reels When a stop control table capable of deriving the result is selected and the stop operation is performed in an area other than a specific area number among the area numbers where the same stop position is determined, the other reels are stopped. As a control table, a stop control table capable of deriving a display result constituting an opportunity is selected, and any bonuser is selected in the normal gaming state. In the case where the same stop position is determined, the other reels are stopped for more area numbers than in the case where no combination is won in the normal gaming state. When a stop control table capable of deriving a display result constituting a chance eye is selected as a table, when the reel operation command is received and the stop operation position satisfies the chance eye derivation condition, that is, the chance In the case where the stop control table capable of deriving the display result constituting the eye is the stop operation position selected, compared to the case where it is another stop operation position that does not satisfy the chance eye derivation condition but becomes the same stop position. Make a special performance (for example, unusual stop sound, etc.) to notify you of the possibility of winning one of the special roles at a high rate Well, in this way, the special effect is performed when the specific reel is stopped, so that the possibility of the chance chance being finally derived is higher than the case where the special effect is not performed when the specific reel is stopped. As a result, it is possible to effectively increase the player's expectation for the derivation of chances and the winning of the special role as the special performance is performed.

  In the present embodiment, when one of the bonuses is won by internal lottery, or when only one (1) or one (2) is won, one (1) or one When (2) cannot be won, that is, when a bonus is won, or when one (1) or one (2) is missed, no part is won by internal lottery Since it is possible to derive a display mode that constitutes a chance eye that is not derived from (losing), a special result is won by deriving a display result that constitutes these chance eyes. It is possible to increase the player's expectation for this.

  In addition, if any winning combination is not won by internal lottery (losing), that is, in the state of occupying most of the normal time, the display result constituting the chance eye is not derived, and any bonus by the internal lottery is not derived. Except for the case where is won, it is possible to derive chance chances by winning one (1) or one (2). For this reason, among all the stop control tables, when all the reels are rotating, a stop control table uniquely determined for the internal winning state for each gaming state is selected, and the selected stop control is selected. The reel stop control is performed according to the table, and when any reel is already stopped, the internal winning state for each game state and the stop position of the stopped reel are uniquely determined. Even if reel stop control is performed according to the selected stop control table, chances can be derived at an appropriate rate without being affected by the skill of the player. Become.

  In addition, for one (1) and one (2) that can be used to derive a chance when a prize cannot be won, a maximum bet number (3) that can be set for one game is set. This is a prize that involves paying out 3 or less (1) medals, which is the number of medals required to win, so that one (1) or one (2) can be won and won by an internal lottery. Even if it is not, the player will not suffer a major disadvantage, and the winning probability of 1 (1) and 1 (2) will not greatly affect the payout rate of the slot machine 1, For example, it is possible to increase the probability that one (1) and one (2) winnings are permitted to increase the chances of deriving chances, effectively increasing the player's expectation for the bonus. be able to.

  In the present embodiment, the number of medals to be paid out with the winning of one (1) and one (2) is one required for setting the minimum unit bet number for one game. Therefore, the payout rate of the slot machine 1 can be hardly affected.

  In this embodiment, one medal is paid out to the player with the winning of one (1) and one (2). The number of medals to be paid out is not limited to one, and the number of medals to be paid out with the occurrence of a winning that can derive a chance is preferably smaller, but can be set for at least one game If the number of medals necessary for setting the maximum bet number (3 in the present embodiment) is three or less (three in the present embodiment), the payout rate of the slot machine 1 can be hardly affected. Also, for example, if the number of payouts differs depending on whether it stops on a plurality of pay lines like a cherry or stops on a single pay line, the number of payouts when the combination of combinations stops on a plurality of pay lines However, if the number of medals is less than the number of medals required to set the maximum bet number that can be set for one game (3 in the present embodiment), the payout rate of the slot machine 1 can be hardly affected.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the left reel, the display mode (area number) in which the 16th “blue 7” symbol constituting the combination of one (1) stops at any one of the upper, middle and lower stages of the left reel. 14-16, 15-17, 16-18) and a display mode in which the “red 7” symbol of No. 9 constituting the combination of one sheet (2) stops at one of the upper, middle and lower stages of the left reel. Area numbers 7-9, 8-10, 9-11) are arranged beyond the maximum pull-in range of 4 frames, respectively, and the stop operation position at which the “red 7” symbol and the “blue 7” symbol can be aimed at the same time When there is a reel stop operation always aiming at one of the symbols constituting the combination of one (1) or the symbol constituting the combination of one (2), one (1) One of the cards (2) can always win, but the other It becomes impossible to stop at the timing that can win the prize, and in this case, the chance chance is derived, so one of the one (1) and one (2) Even when the reel is operated with the aim always at the winning combination, it is possible to make the chance chance appear appropriately. At this time, the winning combination of the other winning combination of 1 (1) and 1 (2) is awarded. Since it is impossible to determine whether the bonus has been won or the bonus has been won, it is possible to effectively increase the player's expectation for the occurrence of the bonus by the appearance of the chance.

  In addition, since one (1) and one (2) have the same winning probability and the same number of medals when winning, the combination of one (1) and one (2) There are few merits to stop the reel by doing only, and as a result, it is possible to reduce the willingness to perform the stop operation aiming at one combination of one (1) and one (2), so it stops at various positions There is a high possibility that the operation is performed, and the display results can be varied.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the left reel, the 6th “cherry” symbol constituting the combination of cherries that pays out more medals than one (1) in the normal gaming state is the upper, middle, The display mode (area numbers 4-6, 5-7, 6-8) that stops at one of the lower tiers, and the 16th or 18th “blue 7” symbol that constitutes one (1) combination is the left reel The display mode (area numbers 14-16, 15-17, 16-18, 17-19, 18-20) that stops at any of the upper, middle, and lower stages exceeds 4 frames, each of which is the maximum drawing range. There is no stop operation position that can aim at the “Cherry” symbol and the “Blue 7” symbol at the same time, and only one of the symbols can be aimed at. In addition, as described above, in the normal gaming state, more medals are paid out when a cherry is won than when one (1) is won. The “Cherry” symbol at the timing, that is, the “Blue 7” symbol that composes one (1) combination cannot be stopped on the winning line, but the sixth “Cherry” that constitutes the cherry combination It is possible to increase the willingness to perform the stop operation at a timing at which the symbol can be stopped on any of the winning lines.

  In addition, a maximum of 4 frames for the “Cherry” symbol of No. 6 and a stop operation position (area number 6 to 12) where the number of frames to be drawn to be stopped on any winning line is determined, and one (1) winning Stop operation position (region number) where the number of pull-in frames for stopping “Replay Watermelon Bell” of symbols 2 to 4 and “Bell, Red 7 and Bell” of symbols 8 to 10 is sometimes configured 4-8, region numbers 10-14) partially overlap, and when a stop operation is performed at these overlapping stop operation positions (region numbers 6-8, region numbers 10-12), If one (1) is selected, the 2-4 symbol “Replay Watermelon Bell” and the 8-10 symbol “Bell / Red 7 / Bell” will stop. Become. For this reason, as the motivation to stop the 6th “cherry” symbol constituting the combination of cherries on any winning line is increased, one piece (1 ) Can be increased when the display results constituting the chance eyes are derived.

  Further, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the regular bonus is activated simultaneously with the transition to the big bonus, and during the big bonus, it is determined whether the regular bonus is activated for each game, and the regular bonus is determined. When it is determined that is not activated, the regular bonus is activated again, so that the regular bonus is always controlled while the big bonus is activated. For this reason, it is only necessary to control the regular bonus while the big bonus is in operation, so that the control accompanying the transition to the big bonus can be simplified, and whether the regular bonus is in operation for each game. Since it is determined whether or not the game is executed, the control program for each game in the big bonus can be made common regardless of whether or not the regular bonus is in operation, so that the program capacity can be reduced.

  Further, while the big bonus is in operation, the regular bonus is always controlled so that the medals can be increased most quickly during the big bonus. Therefore, the regular bonus is activated in accordance with the JACIN winning as in the past. It is possible to increase the interest of the player with the shift to the big bonus. In particular, the total number of medals paid out in the big bonus reaches the specified value (466 in this embodiment) without ending the big bonus at the number of transitions to the regular bonus as in this embodiment. When the end condition is satisfied, the number of net increase in the big bonus can be increased, so that the interest of the player accompanying the shift to the big bonus can be further increased.

  In the present embodiment, before determining whether or not the regular bonus is inactive, it is determined whether or not the big bonus end condition is satisfied, and the big bonus end condition is satisfied in the determination. If the regular bonus is not activated, it is determined whether or not the regular bonus is not activated. If not activated, the regular bonus is activated. A determination for reactivating the bonus, that is, an unnecessary determination is not performed.

  In this embodiment, after the operation of the regular bonus starts, the number of games controlled by the regular bonus reaches the specified number of games (12 games in the present embodiment) or the specified number of times (in this embodiment) (In the form, 8 times) The winning is ended when a winning occurs, but the regular bonus may be ended under only one of the conditions. It may end only when a winning prize is generated. Alternatively, the total number of medals paid out and the net increase in the regular bonus (the number obtained by subtracting the total number of medals consumed for setting the bet number from the total number of medals paid out) may reach the specified number. However, the process may be terminated when any one of these conditions is satisfied.

  Further, in the present embodiment, after the operation of the big bonus is started, the big bonus is ended when the total number of medals paid out in the big bonus reaches a specified value (466 in this embodiment). However, the big bonus may be terminated under other conditions, for example, the net increase in the number of medals in the big bonus (the total number of medals consumed for setting the number of bets is subtracted from the total number of medals paid out) The number of games controlled by the big bonus reaches the specified number of games, the number of transitions to the regular bonus reaches the specified number, and the regular The Big Bonus end condition is met when the bonus ends, etc., or if any of these conditions is met, Vinegar termination conditions may be established.

  Further, in this embodiment, during the big bonus, it is determined whether the regular bonus is in operation for each game. At the same time as the transition to the big bonus, the regular bonus is activated. At the end of the regular bonus, the regular bonus may be activated again so that the regular bonus is always controlled while the big bonus is active. While it is necessary to control only the regular bonus, the control accompanying the transition to the big bonus can be simplified, and it is necessary to determine whether the regular bonus is in operation for each game. The process to reactivate the regular bonus only when the regular bonus ends Because it is sufficient, unnecessary processing is not performed in a state where the control of the regular bonus is not completed.

  Also, in this case, at the end of the regular bonus, before operating the regular bonus again, it is determined whether or not the big bonus end condition is satisfied, and the big bonus end condition is satisfied in the determination. If not, it is preferable to activate the regular bonus again. By doing so, the regular bonus is not reactivated even though the big bonus ends immediately.

  In addition, after the transition to the big bonus, the first regular bonus may be triggered when a specific winning occurs, and the subsequent regular bonus may be reactivated at the end of the regular bonus.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the regular bonus is activated, the RB signal is stopped while the output waiting time of the RB signal indicating that the regular bonus is elapsed, and the output waiting time has elapsed. When the regular bonus is activated continuously during the big bonus, the output of the RB signal stops and the output waiting time has elapsed in this state. Thus, the output of the RB signal is resumed. For this reason, it is possible to determine that the regular bonus has been temporarily interrupted by the external device that has received the RB signal, for example, whether or not the slot machine is operating normally from the externally output signal. Can be properly implemented with an external device.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the role-specific table, the storage address of the determination value number corresponding to only the special role, the storage address of the determination value number corresponding to both the special role and the general role, only the general role In the internal lottery, the number of judgment values for each combination or combination of combinations referenced from the combination table is added to the internal lottery random number acquired. If the result of addition with the number of judgment values corresponding only to the special role overflows, the winning of only the special role is judged, and the result of addition with the number of judgment values corresponding to both the special role and the general role is In the case of overflow, the winning of both the special role and the general role is judged, and when the addition result with the number of judgment values corresponding to only the general role overflows, the winning of only the general role is judged. And Betsuyaku and the general role is adapted to be elected at the same time. In other words, by making it possible to specify the range of judgment values for each of the general roles and special roles, and the range of determination values for which the general roles and special roles are selected in duplicate, from one role-specific table. , Special role and general role can be elected at the same time. As a result, even if the general role is won as a result of the game, the winning of the special role with a higher advantage than the general role is not denied, so the player's expectation for winning the special role is maintained even in such a situation Can be made.

  In the present embodiment, the big bonus (1) or big bonus (2) and the cherry, one (1) or one (2) can be won at the same time, and further, the big bonus (1) or big Big Bonus (1) or Big Bonus (2) and Cherry are winning at the same time than the judgment value range where Bonus (2) and 1 (1) or 1 (2) are won at the same time The big bonus (1) or big bonus (2) and one (1) or one (2) are won more than the probability of winning at the same time. The probability of winning the bonus (2) and cherry at the same time is higher, so when you win the cherry than when you win one (1) or one (2) However, there is a high possibility that the big bonus (1) or big bonus (2) will be won at the same time, so when the general role is won, the expectation for the special role will change depending on the type of the general role Because it can be held, it can enhance interest.

  In this embodiment, in the role-specific table, the storage address of the determination value number corresponding to only the special role, the storage address of the determination value number corresponding to both the special role and the general role, only the general role In the internal lottery, the number of judgment values for each combination or combination of combinations referenced from the combination table is added to the internal lottery random number acquired. If the result of addition with the number of judgment values corresponding only to the special role overflows, the winning of only the special role is judged, and the result of addition with the number of judgment values corresponding to both the special role and the general role is In case of overflow, the winning of both the special role and the general role is determined, and when the addition result with the number of judgment values corresponding to only the general role overflows, the winning of only the general role is determined. So, special The role can be elected at the same time as the role and the general role, but the role table for the general role where the storage address of the general role is registered and the special role where the storage address of the judgment value number of the special role is registered In the internal lottery, for the same random number for internal lottery, the lottery of the general role that refers to the role table for the general role and the special role that refers to the role-specific table for the special role The lottery is separately performed, and the number of judgment values stored in the address area registered in the general role table and the address area registered in the special role table are stored. By making it possible to specify from the number of judgment values the range of judgment values that the general and special roles are each won separately and the range of judgment values that are won by the general and special roles in duplicate. And general roles at the same time Even if it is configured as such, even if a general role winning is generated as a result of the game, winning of a special role with a higher advantage than the general role is not denied, Even in the situation, the player's expectation for winning the special role can be maintained.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the storage address of the judgment value number of each combination and combination of combinations registered in the combination table may differ depending on the set value. For the combination of combinations and combinations that have the same winning probability, the number of determination values is stored in common regardless of the set value. By storing the number of determination values in common in this way, the storage capacity required for that is reduced. However, in the role-specific table, the number of determination values stored at different addresses even if the target combination or combination of the internal lottery is the same and the addresses storing the number of determination values referenced according to the set value are different. May be the same.

  In general, in the development stage, it is assumed that the simulation is performed while adjusting the number of judgment values (that is, winning probability) according to the set value for at least some of the roles (that is, adjusting the winning probability of internal lottery). Yes. As the initial number of determination values, a different number of determination values is registered according to the set value. However, as a result of adjustment by simulation, the number of determination values when the set values are different may be the same. Although the same number of judgment values was registered as the initial number of judgment values according to the set value, the number of judgment values registered from the beginning may be used as it is depending on the result of simulation (result of simulation). The number of judgment values different from the initial value, that is, the number of judgment values may differ depending on the set value). Then, the number of determination values obtained with an appropriate result in the simulation in each case is selected as the number of determination values to be set for the mass production model.

  Here, even if the number of determination values adjusted by simulation becomes the same regardless of the setting value, the number of determination values is stored in the ROM 41b by the same address allocation as the address allocation in the development stage, It can be used as a model for mass production. For this reason, it is not necessary to change the method for storing the number of judgment values from the development model in the mass production model, and the development from the initial design stage to the transition to the mass production model can be easily performed. Become.

  In addition, the internal lottery adds the number of judgment values of each combination or combination of combinations referred from the combination table to the acquired random number for internal lottery, and whether or not the result of the addition overflows, Whether or not each winning combination or winning combination is won is determined. For this reason, an internal lottery can be performed using the number of determination values of each combination or combination of combinations as it is. It should be noted that when the winning determination table is generated before the actual winning determination is made, the loop processing is required twice, but according to this embodiment, the loop processing in the lottery processing can be performed only once. Thus, the processing efficiency in the entire lottery process is high.

  In the present embodiment, the CPU 41a transmits a command according to the progress of the game to the effect control board 90, and the sub control unit 91 mounted on the effect control board 90 is transmitted from the game control board 40. The production control is performed based on the command, and the CPU 41a does not need to control the production only by transmitting the command. Therefore, the processing load on the CPU 41a can be reduced, and the production can be varied. it can.

  Further, a command transmission line for transmitting a command from the game control board 40 to the effect control board 90 is connected between the game control board 40 and the effect control board 90 via the effect relay board 80, and the game control board Since the production control board 90 is not directly connected to 40, it is possible to prevent an illegal signal from being input from the command transmission line to the CPU 41a from the outside and affecting the control of the game.

  Further, when determining whether or not there is an abnormal winning, when the value of the bit assigned to each type of the combination is 0, it indicates that the winning of the combination is permitted and is 1 When the abnormal winning determination flag indicating that the winning of the winning combination is not permitted and the value of the bit assigned to each type of the winning combination is 1, it indicates that the winning combination is 1 And a winning symbol flag indicating that the winning combination has not been won, and the value of the zero flag of the F register indicating whether the calculation result is 0, that is, whether the calculation result is 0, is calculated. It is possible to determine whether or not it is an abnormal winning just by referring to it, and it is not necessary to specify the bit of the winning flag of the winning combination that has been established as before and check the value of the specified bit , Simplify the process when determining whether or not there is an abnormal winning It can be.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the value of the bit assigned to each type of the combination is 1, it indicates that the winning of the corresponding combination is permitted, and when it is 0, the winning of the corresponding combination is permitted. An internal winning flag indicating that the internal winning flag is not stored is set in the internal winning flag storing work (iwin_flag) assigned to the RAM 41c, and an operation for inverting 1 and 0 of each bit of the internal winning flag is performed. A flag is created. In other words, once an internal winning flag similar to the conventional winning flag is created, 1 and 0 of each bit of the internal winning flag are inverted to create abnormal winning determination data, so the internal winning flag is abnormally won. It can also be used for purposes other than creating determination data (for example, a test signal to be output to the outside or data for creating a command to be output to the sub-control unit 91).

  Further, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when an abnormal winning occurs, that is, when a winning combination that is not permitted in the game is won, the game is controlled in an error state due to an abnormal winning error and the progress of the game is impossible. It becomes. That is, when an unacceptable winning combination wins, there is a possibility that the data is destroyed or an abnormal program is operating, and thus the progress of the game is disabled.

  Once an error state due to a RAM error or an abnormal winning error is controlled, the game cannot be progressed unless the setting change mode is entered and a setting value is newly selected and set based on the setting change operation. The normalized state is not released. In other words, if the set value is not appropriate due to garbled data or abnormal program operation, the set bet number is not the bet number according to the gaming state, or if an unacceptable hand wins, the slot machine The setting value selected and set based on the setting change operation instead of the setting value automatically set by (the setting change operation is generally performed by an amusement store employee. Value), it is ensured that the game will be played, so that the fairness of the game can be achieved.

  In the present embodiment, when it is determined that the winning setting is not an appropriate setting value in the internal lottery process, the RAM abnormal error state is controlled. When the set value stored in the set value work of the RAM 41c is not an appropriate value (a value in the range of 1 to 6), the winning of the winning is determined with a probability based on the initial value of the set value (for example, the set value 1). You may make it do. Further, when it is determined that the set bet number is not the bet number according to the gaming state at the time of the internal lottery, it is controlled to the RAM abnormal error state. When the number is not the bet number according to the gaming state, the number of bets according to the gaming state may be updated to continue the process.

  Below, the modification regarding the abnormal winning determination of the said embodiment is demonstrated. 49 to 51 are diagrams showing modifications of the abnormal winning determination process shown in FIG.

  In the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9, the value of the bit corresponding to the winning combination in the internal winning flag is 1 and the values of the other bits are 0. In the winning symbol flag, the value of the bit corresponding to the winning combination is 1 and the values of the other bits are 0. Then, all the bits of the internal winning flag are inverted, and a logical product (AND) with the winning symbol flag is calculated, and when the result becomes 00H (all bits are 0), other than the regular winning, other than 00H (any one) When the bit becomes 1), it is determined that the prize is abnormal.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 49, the value calculated in this way after calculating the logical product (AND) of the value obtained by inverting all the bits of the internal winning flag and the winning symbol flag, as in the above embodiment. Further, all the bits of the above are further inverted, and when the result becomes FFH (all bits are 1), it is determined that the regular winning is achieved, and when the result is other than FFH (any bit is 0), the abnormal winning is determined. .

  Further, as shown in FIG. 50, after calculating the logical sum (OR) of the internal winning flag and the value obtained by inverting all bits of the winning symbol, all the bits of the calculated value are further inverted, and the result It may be determined that the regular winning is when 00 becomes 00H (all bits are 0), and the abnormal winning is when other than 00H (any bit is 1). In this case, as in the case of the embodiment, it is determined whether or not there is an abnormal winning by simply checking the value of the zero flag of the F register (flag register) indicating whether the calculation result is 00H, that is, whether the calculation result is 0 or not. Can be determined.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 51, the logical sum (OR) of the internal winning flag and the value obtained by inverting all the bits of the winning symbol is calculated, and the result becomes FFH (all bits are 1). It may be determined that there is an abnormal winning when it becomes other than winning or FFH (any bit is 0).

  As described above, also in the modified example of the abnormal winning determination shown in FIGS. 49 to 51, the logical winning operation or logical product of the internal winning flag or the value obtained by inverting the internal winning flag and the winning symbol flag or the value obtained by inverting the winning symbol flag is performed. It is possible to determine whether the result of the calculation is a value other than 0, or whether it is a value other than 1, and it is possible to determine whether or not it is an abnormal winning. It is not necessary to bother identifying the winning flag bit of the winning combination and confirming the value of the identified bit, so that the process for determining whether or not an abnormal winning is made can be simplified.

  In the case of FIG. 50 and FIG. 51, if the winning symbol flag set in accordance with winning is reversed in advance for all bits, that is, the value of the bit corresponding to the winning combination is 0, and the other bits If the winning symbol flag is set so that the value of 1 becomes 1, the step of inverting all the bits of the winning symbol flag in the abnormal winning determination process becomes unnecessary.

  49 and 51, when determining whether or not the calculation result is FFH, 1 is added to the calculation result, and when the value after the addition overflows, it is determined that the calculation result is FFH. When the overflow does not occur, it is preferable to determine that the operation result is other than FFH. In such a case, it is only necessary to check the value of the carry flag of the F register indicating whether the operation result has overflowed. It is possible to determine whether or not the prize is abnormal.

  On the other hand, as in the above-described embodiment, the internal winning flag has a bit value corresponding to the internal winning combination set to 1 and the other bits have a value of 0, and the winning symbol flag indicates the winning combination. A description will be given of a modified example in which an abnormal winning is determined without inverting all the bits in any flag when the value of the corresponding bit is 1 and the values of the other bits are 0.

  In this modification, the internal winning flag is applied as an abnormal winning determination flag. Then, from the value of each bit of the internal winning flag, the value of the bit at the same position in the winning symbol flag is subtracted, and on the condition that the subtraction result does not become a negative number in all the bits, whether or not it is an abnormal winning Determine whether. For example, when the value of the 0th bit of the winning symbol flag is subtracted from the value of the 0th bit of the internal winning flag to determine whether the subtraction result is a negative number, Then, the value of the first bit of the winning symbol flag is subtracted from the value of the next bit, that is, the first bit of the internal winning flag, and the result is judged, and finally, from the 0th bit to the 15th bit. In all cases, it is determined that there is no abnormal winning on the condition that the subtraction result is not a negative number.

  In such a case, it is possible to determine whether or not there is an abnormal winning only by confirming the value of the sign flag of the F register indicating whether or not the calculation result has become a negative number. Furthermore, as in the above-described embodiments and modifications, it is possible to determine whether or not the internal winning flag and the winning symbol flag are abnormal winnings without inverting the bits.

  Next, a modification of the method for setting abnormal winning determination data from the result of the internal lottery will be described.

  In the above embodiment, by converting the internal winning flag according to the winning number using the number / flag conversion table storing the value of the internal winning flag corresponding to the winning number, and further inverting the internal winning flag. Although abnormal winning determination data is set, for example, abnormal winning determination data corresponding to the winning number using the number / flag conversion table storing the value of the abnormal winning determination data corresponding to the winning number itself is stored. In this case, the abnormal winning determination flag is simply determined by simply referring to the data stored in the number / flag conversion table corresponding to the winning number. Can be set.

  Further, in this case, in addition to the abnormal winning determination data corresponding to the winning number in the number / flag conversion table, the abnormal winning determination flag for the regular bonus is stored. Refers to the data stored in the number / flag conversion table corresponding to the winning number, and only refers to the abnormal bonus determination flag for the regular bonus stored in the number / flag conversion table during the regular bonus. With this simple procedure, the abnormal winning determination flag can be set.

  Further, the internal winning flag may be calculated by calculation using the value of the winning number, and the abnormal winning determination data may be set by inverting the internal winning flag.

  (1) Although the embodiment of the present invention has been described with reference to the drawings, the present invention is not limited to this embodiment, and even if there are changes or additions within the scope not departing from the gist of the present invention. It goes without saying that it is included in the present invention.

  (2) For example, in the above embodiment, a big bonus with different big bonus end conditions, that is, a big bonus that ends when the number obtained during the big bonus reaches 301, which is the first specified value ( 2) and a big bonus (1) that ends when the number of sheets acquired during the big bonus reaches 466, which is the second specified value, which is larger than 301, which is the first specified value. Although it is possible, for example, a big bonus (3) in which a second specified value that is larger than the first specified value is set during the big bonus may be generated. That is, as the big bonus, a plurality of types of big bonuses having different prescribed values may be generated.

  (3) The timing at which the winning symbols can be stopped on the winning line for the two types of bonuses is not duplicated, and a continuous performance is performed with the chance as an opportunity over two games that are less than the number of types. However, the timing at which the winning symbols can be stopped on the winning line for three or more types of bonuses may be configured so as not to overlap, and continuous production may be performed over the number of games equal to or less than the number of types. .

  (4) In the above embodiment, as an example of the special gaming state, a special game (regular bonus) in which a small winning prize is generated with a higher probability than the normal gaming state reaches a predetermined period (12 games) or 8 Big bonus (1) and big bonus (2) to be controlled) were applied, but for example, the drawing range of symbols is smaller than the normal gaming state, but the winning of a specific small role Even if the flag is not won, a challenge bonus (CB) that allows winning a small role with a higher probability than in the normal gaming state by allowing a small role to be drawn and stopped May be.

  (5) In other words, the big bonus (2) that ends when the total number of medals paid out in the big bonus is equal to or greater than the second specified number, and the total number of medals paid out in the big bonus is greater than the second specified number. If the special game state to be transferred is the same (same type) as in the case of the big bonus (1) that ends when the number exceeds the specified number of ones, the advantage to the player is increased. Special game states with different controls, that is, a special game state with different control for increasing the winning probability, for example, the challenge bonus (2) that ends when the total number of medals paid out in the challenge bonus exceeds the second specified number, Apply Challenge Bonus (1), etc. that ends when the total number of medals paid out exceeds the first specified number, which is greater than the second specified number It may be.

  (6) Also, in the above embodiment, the big bonus (1) when the stop function is set to be invalid after the game ends at the time of the big bonus winning until the BB winning effect waiting time elapses. Or after the game ends at the end of the big bonus (2), until the ending waiting time elapses, after the ending waiting time elapses at the end of the big bonus (1) when the stop function is enabled, The bet number setting is prohibited in any period from when the clerk performs a reset operation until the stop state is released, but at least one of these bets Any setting may be prohibited.

  (7) In the above embodiment, the production wait time for the production at the BB prize and the production wait time for the production at the end of the BB may be the same time or different times.

  (8) In the above embodiment, the big bonus (1) or the big bonus (2) is awarded as a transitional prize that prohibits the setting of the bet amount for a certain period of time (the waiting time for production of the BB prize effect) when winning. However, other special roles (such as regular bonus winnings) may be applied, or may be applied to multiple types of special roles. Furthermore, even for the same type of special role, among them, there are more than one type of big bonus prize or regular bonus prize (for example, one of the combinations of symbols constituting the bonus prize, the color of the symbols constituting the bonus prize) Or if the two are different, or if the bonus consists of different bonus controls, such as the number of medals that can be expected during the bonus, etc. Sometimes the setting of the number of bets may be prohibited for a certain period. Further, the period during which the setting of the bet amount is prohibited at the time of winning may differ depending on the type of special combination (big bonus winning and regular bonus winning) and the type of big bonus winning or regular bonus winning. Then, an effect at the time of bonus winning having a different execution time may be executed according to a period during which setting of the bet number is prohibited.

  (9) In the above embodiment, only the big bonus (1) or the big bonus (2) is set as a special gaming state in which the setting of the bet amount is prohibited for a certain period of time (end effect production waiting time) at the end. Although applied, other special game states (such as regular bonus) may be applied, or may be applied to a plurality of types of special game states. Furthermore, even in the same type of special gaming state, there are even more types of big bonuses and regular bonuses (for example, combinations of symbols that constitute bonus winnings that trigger the transition to the bonus, transition timing to the bonus If one or both of the colors of the symbols constituting the bonus prize are different, or the number of medals that can be expected during the bonus, etc. Only for a specific bonus, the setting of the bet number may be prohibited for a certain period at the end. Further, the period during which the setting of the bet number is prohibited at the end may be different depending on the type of special gaming state (big bonus and regular bonus) and the type of big bonus or regular bonus. And you may make it perform the ending effect from which execution time differs according to the period when the setting of the number of bets is prohibited.

  (10) In the above embodiment, in the game in which the big bonus (1) or big bonus (2) end condition is satisfied, the ending effect is executed after it is determined that the game has ended. However, such an ending effect is not necessarily performed. In such a case, the prohibition on the setting of the betting amount is canceled at the time when it is determined that the game has ended, and the prohibition on the settlement of credits based on the effective detection of the settlement switch 10 may be canceled. . Further, in this case, in the game in which the big bonus (1) end condition is satisfied, when the stop function is set to be effective, it is determined that the game has ended, and then the stop state is released. When the prohibition of setting the number of bets is released, and if the automatic checkout function is enabled, it is determined that the game has ended and the checkout state is released after credit checkout is performed. When this is done, the prohibition on the setting of the number of bets may be lifted.

  (11) In the above embodiment, only the big bonus (1) is applied as a special game state controlled to a stop state in which setting of the bet number is prohibited until a reset operation is performed after the end. However, other special game states (such as a big bonus (2) or a regular bonus) may be applied, or may be applied to a plurality of types of special game states. Furthermore, even in the same type of special gaming state, there are even more types of big bonuses and regular bonuses (for example, combinations of symbols that constitute bonus winnings that trigger the transition to the bonus, transition timing to the bonus If one or both of the colors of the symbols constituting the bonus prize are different, or the number of medals that can be expected during the bonus, etc. Only a specific bonus may be controlled to be stopped after completion.

  (12) In the above embodiment, only the big bonus (1) is applied as the special gaming state in which the credit settlement based on the effective setting of the automatic settlement function is performed after the completion, but other special games A state (such as a big bonus (2) or a regular bonus) may be applied, or may be applied to a plurality of special game states. Furthermore, even in the same type of special gaming state, there are even more types of big bonuses and regular bonuses (for example, combinations of symbols that constitute bonus winnings that trigger the transition to the bonus, transition timing to the bonus If one or both of the colors of the symbols constituting the bonus prize are different, or the number of medals that can be expected during the bonus, etc. Only a specific bonus may be controlled to be stopped after completion.

  (13) Further, in the above embodiment, even if the big bonus (1) or big bonus (2) end condition is satisfied, credit settlement is prohibited when the end of the game is determined. Credit can be settled even during the period when the setting of the bet amount is prohibited (ending waiting time for the ending effect). For example, in a game where the big bonus (1) end condition is satisfied, When the elapsed time after the end is judged reaches the production waiting time for the ending effect, control is made to the stop state (or after reaching the end time for the ending effect and the settlement of the credit is finished, the stop state is entered. Control) and setting the bet amount until the elapsed time after the end of the game is determined reaches the waiting time for producing the ending effect. Prohibits both credit settlement based on the effective detection of the adjusting switch 10, when the elapsed time has reached to the effect latency ending effect, it may be released only prohibition of credit settlement. Thereby, in the game in which the condition for ending the big bonus (1) is satisfied, until the elapsed time after the end of the game is determined reaches the effect waiting time for the ending effect, it is based on the effective detection of the settlement switch 10. Although the credit cannot be settled, in the subsequent stop state, it is possible to settle the credit based on the effective detection of the check switch 10 without waiting for the release of the stop state. Reflecting it, it is possible to receive medals for credits stored as owned by the player. This makes it possible to receive a medal return reflecting the will of the player who wants to end the game immediately after the end waiting time for the ending effect has elapsed, particularly when the big bonus ends.

  (14) In the above embodiment, the end of the game is determined by the end of the game end process. However, the game is substantially ended by the end of the medal payout. The end of the game may be determined by the end. In other words, the credit can be settled from the end of the payout process.

  (15) In the embodiment, the timer count for the effect waiting time for timing the effect waiting time for the BB winning effect and the timer count for the effect waiting time for timing the effect waiting time for the ending effect Although a common timer counter is used, these timer counters may be provided separately.

  (16) In the above embodiment, when the rotation of the reel is started and when the reel is stopped and the reel that is still rotating still remains, the table index and table creation stored in the ROM 41b are used. While referring to the data, a stop control table is created for each reel that is rotating, but the stop control table for each internal winning state for each gaming state and for each reel stop status (and stopped stop position) Is registered in the ROM 41b in advance, and based on the table index, it becomes possible to specify the necessary stop control table according to the internal winning state for each gaming state and the stop state of the reel, and when the reel rotation starts And when the reels are stopped and there are still spinning reels, refer to the table index. By rotating reel may set a stop control table.

  (17) Moreover, in the said embodiment, although the value of 6 steps of the range of 1-6 is applied as a setting value used for internal lottery, ie, a setting value which determined the winning probability of internal lottery, The present invention is not limited to this, and any setting value that can select and set at least a plurality of steps of setting values may be used. For example, setting values that can select two steps of high / low and three steps of 1 to 3 are possible. A setting value that allows selection of the setting value may be applied. Further, the setting values work 1 to 3 of the RAM 41c store the values 1 to 6 themselves as values indicating these setting values, but any value that can specify the setting value may be stored. For example, 0 to 5 (a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the actual set value) corresponding to the set values 1 to 6 may be stored in the set value works 1 to 3.

  (18) In the embodiment, the setting value determination processing 1 for determining whether or not the value read from the setting value work 1 is in the range of 1 to 6, the value read from the setting value work 1, and the setting value work Set value determination processing 2 for determining whether or not the value read from 2 matches, the value read from the set value work 1 and the value read from the set value work 3 are determined to match. The set value determination process 3 to be executed is executed to determine whether or not the set value used for the internal lottery is appropriate. However, any one of these set value determination processes 1 to 3 is performed. Thus, it may be determined whether or not the set value used for the internal lottery is appropriate. For example, the set value determination process 1 only, the set value determination process 2 only, the set value determination Those that perform only processing 3, set value judgment It performs any two of the processing of the physical 1-3, or the like.

  (19) Further, any one of the set value determination processes 1 to 3 is performed for each game, and the remaining one process or all the remaining processes are performed for a predetermined trigger (for example, for every predetermined number of games, the bonus end) Or two of the set value determination processes are performed for each game, and the remaining one process is executed at a predetermined opportunity. Also good.

  (20) In the embodiment, the set value determination processes 1 to 3 are executed for each game. However, the set value determination processes 1 to 3 are not performed for each game. May be performed every predetermined number of games, or may be performed in a game of a specific period (such as a period excluding bonus).

  (21) Moreover, in the said embodiment, in the internal lottery process, the setting value determination processes 1-3 which determine whether the setting value used for an internal lottery is appropriate are performed, The timing is It may be at any timing during one game, for example, at the start of the game or at the end of the game.

  (22) In the embodiment, in the internal lottery process, the value of the set value work 3 is updated to the value read from the set value work 1 (the set value read for use in the internal lottery of the current game). However, the timing at which the value of the set value work 3 is updated to the value read from the set value work 1 is any timing until the game ends (for example, when all the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are stopped). Or at the end of the medal payout).

  (23) In the embodiment, when the setting is changed, the set value is stored in the two areas of the set value work 1 and the set value work 2, and is stored in the set value work 1 in the set value determination process 2. It is determined whether or not the stored value and the value stored in the set value work 2 match. If they do not match, it is determined that the set value is not an appropriate set value. A set value is stored, and in the set value determination process 2, it is determined whether or not all the values stored in these three or more storage areas match. If they do not match, it is determined that the set value is not an appropriate value. You may make it do.

  (24) Further, when the setting is changed, the set value is stored in three or more storage areas. In the set value determination process 2, whether or not the values stored in these three or more areas match a predetermined number or more ( For example, setting values are stored in five storage areas, and it is determined whether or not three or more of the values match, and if a predetermined number or more does not match, it is determined that the setting values are not appropriate. In this way, even if a part of the data indicating the setting value stored at the time of setting change is lost due to noise or the like, it is erroneously determined that it is not an appropriate setting value and the game cannot proceed Can be prevented.

  (25) In the above embodiment, only the set value used in the internal lottery of the previous game is stored in the set value work 3, and the value stored in the set value work 1 in the set value determination process 3 Whether or not the value stored in the setting value work 3 matches, that is, whether or not the setting value used for the internal lottery of the current game matches the setting value used for the internal lottery of the previous game. If it does not match, it is determined that the set value is not an appropriate set value. However, the set value used for the internal lottery of each game is stored for the predetermined number of games before the previous game, and in the set value determination process 3 this time It is determined whether or not the setting value used for the internal lottery of the game matches the setting value used for the internal lottery of the game before the previous game (for example, a game before a predetermined number of games). When not to In, it may be judged not to be the proper setting value.

  (26) In addition to storing the set values used for the internal lottery of each game over a predetermined number of games before the previous game, the set value used for the internal lottery of the current game in the set value determination process 3 and the previous game It may be determined whether or not all the set values used in the internal lottery of the plurality of previous games match, and if they do not match, it is determined that the set values are not appropriate.

  (27) Furthermore, the set values used for the internal lottery of each game are stored for a predetermined number of games before the previous game, and the set value used for the internal lottery of the current game in the set value determination processing 3 and the previous game Whether or not each set value used in the internal lottery of a plurality of previous games matches a predetermined number or more (for example, each set value used in the internal lottery of the past five games is stored in five storage areas). And whether or not three or more of these values match, etc.), and if they do not match a predetermined number or more, it may be determined that the set value is not an appropriate value. Thus, even when a part of the data indicating the set value stored at the time of changing the setting is lost, it is possible to prevent the game from being disabled due to an erroneous determination that the set value is not appropriate.

  (28) In the above embodiment, when determining the winning of the winning in the internal lottery process, if it is determined that the set value is not an appropriate set value in the set value determining process, the RAM is controlled to an abnormal error state. However, when the setting value stored in the setting value work of the RAM 41c is not an appropriate value (a value in the range of 1 to 6), the initial value of the setting value (for example, the setting value 1) is set. You may make it determine winning of a prize with the probability based on.

  (29) In the embodiment, the RAM parity adjustment data is stored so that the RAM parity of the RAM 41c becomes 0 in the power interruption processing, and it is determined whether the RAM parity of the RAM 41c is 0 at the time of restoration. As a result, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 41c is normal. Of course, the RAM parity adjustment data is stored so that the RAM parity of the RAM 41c becomes 1 in the power interruption processing, and the RAM 41c is restored at the time of recovery. By determining whether or not the RAM parity is 1, it may be determined whether or not the data in the RAM 41c is normal. Further, the checksum (exclusive OR of data stored in the corresponding area) of all areas of the RAM 41c is calculated and stored in a specific area in the power interruption processing, and the RAM 41c is restored at the time of restoration. If the result is 00H, it is determined that the data in the RAM 41c is normal, and if it is not 00H, the data in the RAM 41c is abnormal. You may make it determine with it.

  (30) This means that if the checksum is stored normally in the power interruption processing, the checksum of the area excluding the specific area and the data stored in the specific area (calculated at the time of power interruption) If the checksum of the area excluding the specific area matches the data stored in the specific area, the exclusive OR of both data is calculated. Since the result is 00H, it is possible to determine that the data in the RAM 41c is normal if the result of calculating the checksum of all areas including the specific area where the checksum of the RAM 41c is stored is 00H. is there.

  (31) Even in this case, in the power interruption interrupt processing, before the checksum is calculated, the destructive diagnosis data (for example, 5AH) in which one of the bits is 1 is stored at a predetermined address, and at the time of recovery In addition to determining whether or not the checksum is 00H, whether or not the destructive diagnosis data is normally stored is determined. The checksum is 00H and the destructive diagnosis data is also normal. Under these conditions, it is preferable to determine that the data in the RAM 41c is normal. Even if the data in the RAM 41c is not normal, if 00H is stored in all areas, it is determined to be normal by the checksum determination at the time of startup, but any bit is set to 1 at the time of power failure. After the destructive diagnostic data is stored, the checksum is calculated and stored in a specific area. In addition to checking the checksum at startup, the destructive diagnostic data is also checked. Even when all the areas are cleared to 0 and the checksum is 00H and is determined to be normal, the destruction diagnosis data does not match the value stored at the time of the power failure and is determined to be abnormal. It is possible to improve the accuracy of determining the abnormality of the data stored in.

  (32) In the above, the RAM parity or checksum of the RAM 41c is calculated and stored in the RAM 41c in the power interruption process, and the RAM parity calculated based on all areas of the RAM 41c is 0 at the time of restoration. Whether or not the data in the RAM 41c is normal based on whether or not the checksum calculated based on all areas of the RAM 41c is 00H. RAM parity or checksum of the RAM 41c is calculated and stored in a specific area, and the RAM parity or checksum excluding the specific area of the RAM 41c at the time of recovery is calculated, and the RAM parity or checksum stored in the specific area is calculated. Depending on whether or not the comparison result matches with the RAM 41c, Data may be determined whether normal or not. In this case as well, as described above, before the RAM parity or checksum is calculated, the destructive diagnosis data in which any bit is 1 is stored at a predetermined address. In addition to determining whether or not the sums match, it is determined whether or not the destructive diagnosis data is stored correctly, the RAM parity and checksum match, and the destructive diagnosis data is also normal. It is preferable to determine that the data in the RAM 41c is normal under the above conditions.

  (33) In the above-described embodiment, 5AH is stored in the RAM 41c as the failure diagnosis data in the power interruption processing. However, any data other than 0 may be stored and confirmed at the start-up. Even in such a configuration, if all the areas are cleared to 0 at startup, the destruction diagnosis data does not match the value stored at the time of a power failure and is determined to be abnormal. It is possible to improve the accuracy of determining the abnormality of stored data.

  (34) In the above embodiment, when the CPU 41a is activated, the RAM parity of the RAM 41c is calculated, whether or not the result is 0 is determined, and the destructive diagnosis is performed on the condition that the RAM parity is 0. It is determined whether the data for storage is stored normally, but first, it is determined whether the data for destruction diagnosis is stored normally, and the data for diagnosis of breakdown is stored normally. The RAM parity of the RAM 41c may be calculated on the condition, and it may be determined whether or not the result is 0. In this way, when the destructive diagnosis data is not normally stored, Therefore, it is possible to determine that the data in the RAM 41c is abnormal without calculating the RAM parity.

  (35) In the above-described embodiment, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 41c is normal only when the main control unit 41 is activated. However, other triggers, for example, every game are determined. Also good.

  (36) In the embodiment, the main control unit 41 is activated based on a reset signal from the reset circuit 49 provided separately from the main control unit 41. The microcomputer which comprises the control part 41 may be mounted.

  (37) In the above embodiment, the RAM 41c is mounted on the microcomputer constituting the main control unit 41. However, the RAM used as a work of the microcomputer may be mounted outside the microcomputer. Good.

  (38) In the above embodiment, the power interruption detection circuit 48 monitors the DC voltage used in the slot machine 1 and detects power interruption when the DC voltage falls below a certain voltage. However, for example, the power interruption may be detected when the period during which the DC voltage is equal to or lower than a certain voltage continues for a certain period. Alternatively, the AC voltage supplied to the slot machine 1 may be monitored to detect a power interruption when a disturbance in the waveform of the AC voltage is detected, or when the period continues for a certain period.

  (39) In the above embodiment, the power interruption detection circuit 48 is mounted on the game control board 40. However, the power interruption detection circuit 48 may be mounted in other places, for example, from the power supply board 100 or the power supply board 100. It may be mounted on a relay board or the like through which a power supply line to the game control board 40 passes.

  (40) Moreover, in the said embodiment, the error code | cord | chord is displayed on the game auxiliary | assistant display 12 by displaying the error code according to the error state on the content of various error states. In other words, the notification means controlled by the game control unit 41 is notified, but in addition to the notification means controlled by the game control unit 41, a command indicating an error state is transmitted to the effect control unit 91, The notification unit controlled by the control unit 91 may notify the error, or the notification unit controlled by the effect control unit 91 does not perform the notification by the notification unit controlled by the game control unit 41. An error notification may be performed.

  (41) In the above embodiment, 21 regions (frames) divided every 8 steps (each symbol) are defined for one reel, and each region (region) is defined as a stop control table. No.), the stop control table in which the number of frames to be drawn (stop position) is uniquely determined, that is, the stop control table in which the stop position is uniquely determined corresponding to the range of the range where one symbol varies. The reel stop control is performed by using, for example, the number of drawing steps and the number of drawing frames (stop position) for each region less than one symbol, for example, one step, that is, for every minimum unit when driving the reel motor. The stop control of the reel may be performed using a stop control table that uniquely determines the position, and in this way, the stop position can be changed in units of the number of steps of the reel motor. Next, it is possible to further diversify the stop position relative to the stop operation position.

  (42) Also, in the above embodiment, among the plurality of stop control tables that uniquely determine the number of draw-in pieces with respect to the stop operation position, the internal winning state of each gaming state, the reel stop status (and stopped) The stop control table uniquely determined for the stop position) is selected, and the reel stop control is performed according to the selected stop control table. Using the stop position specification table instead of the stop control table, when a stop operation is detected, the stop position is referred to and the reel is stopped at the stop position uniquely specified corresponding to the stop operation position. Control may be performed.

  (43) In addition, instead of the stop control table, a plurality of stop priority tables that uniquely determine the stop position with respect to the stop operation position (the number of steps from the reel reference position) are determined by determining the stop priority for the stop position. When a stop operation is detected, the stop priority table is referenced and the stop priorities of all stop positions within the retractable range (up to 5 frames) from the stop operation position are compared and the most stop priority is You may make it perform control which stops a reel in a high stop position.

  (44) Further, the number of drawn-in frames uniquely determined for each internal winning state of each gaming state and the reel stop status (and the stop position of the stopped reel or the stop operation position of the stopped reel) If the target stop position is located within the range of the selected number of pull-in frames when the stop operation is performed, the pull-in control is performed to pull the stop position and stop. Kicking control (so-called control method control) may be performed in which other stop positions are pulled in and stopped so as not to stop the prohibited stop positions. By performing the pull-in control and kick-off control in this way, the stop position is uniquely determined with respect to the stop operation position (number of steps from the reel reference position). Therefore, the control for deriving the display result by the pull-in control and kick-off control is It can be said that this is a control pattern for uniquely specifying the stop position with respect to the stop operation position.

  (45) In addition, a control pattern uniquely determined for each internal winning state of each gaming state and the stop status of the reel (and the stop position of the stopped reel or the stop operation position of the stopped reel) If the reel stop control is performed according to the selected control pattern, the reel stop control by the stop control table, the reel stop control by the stop priority table, the reel stop control by the pull-in control and the kick control are used in combination. For example, only the reels that have stopped first are controlled to stop the reels using the stop control table, and the other reels are controlled to be stopped by pull-in control and kick-off control. Also good.

  (46) In the embodiment, a control pattern uniquely determined for the internal winning state and the reel stop status (and the stop operation position of the stopped reel) is selected, and according to the control pattern. Reel stop control is performed, but the selected control is selected from a plurality of control patterns determined for the internal winning state and the reel stop status (and the stop operation position of the stopped reel). Reel stop control may be performed according to a pattern.

  (47) In the embodiment, the determination value number storage area of the RAM 41c in which the determination value number used for the internal lottery is stored uses a 2-byte area to store the determination value number in each case. I was trying. Of course, in a general slot machine, the number of judgment values for special roles is not often set to exceed 255 in any gaming situation. Thus, for those that do not need to set the number of determination values exceeding 255, the number of determination values may be stored using only a 1-byte area.

  (48) Further, in the above-described embodiment, a part of the determination value number that is common regardless of the set value is stored in common for all of the set values 1 to 6, but the number of determination values is Regardless of the set values, common items can also be stored individually for each of the set values 1 to 6. Further, if the number of determination values is common regardless of the set value, all of them can be stored in common for all of the set values 1 to 6.

  (49) In the above embodiment, whether the number of determination values is stored in common for all of the setting values 1 to 6 or individually stored for each of the setting values 1 to 6. It was. However, it is assumed that the number of determination values is not stored in common for all of the setting values 1 to 6 (the common flag for the setting value is not set). About 4-6, the number of judgment values can also be made common.

  (50) In the above embodiment, the number of determination values referred to according to the gaming state (state number) is the same for each gaming state (state number) for the same combination or combination of roles at the same setting value. Stored at different addresses. That is, the same combination or combination of combinations with the same set value is stored separately even if the number of determination values referred to according to the gaming state (state number) is the same, but the gaming state (state number) Regardless of the combination of combinations or combinations of combinations that have the same winning probability regardless, the storage address of the judgment value number is shared, or the winning probability is the same regardless of the setting value and gaming state (state number) For the combination or combination of combinations, the storage address of the determination value number may be shared, and by storing the determination value number in common as described above, the storage capacity required for this is reduced. It will be enough.

  (51) Moreover, in the said embodiment, although the determination value number acquired according to the setting value etc. was added sequentially to the value of the random number for internal lottery, it was for internal lottery which acquired the acquired determination value number. It is also possible to sequentially subtract from the random number value and use the result of the subtraction as a new random value for internal lottery. When the number of determination values is subtracted from the random number value for internal lottery, it can be determined whether or not an overflow has occurred in the subtraction result (here, the subtraction result becomes negative).

  (52) In the above embodiment, in the internal lottery, the number of determination values of each combination or combination of combinations corresponding to the gaming state is sequentially added to the acquired random number value for internal lottery. When an overflow occurs, the combination or combination of combinations is determined to be winning. On the other hand, a winning determination table that defines a range of determination values for determining each combination or combination of winning combinations according to the number of determination values for each combination or combination according to the gaming state is determined for each game. The internal lottery may be performed by comparing the created and acquired random number value for internal lottery with the determination value range of each combination or combination of combinations. In addition, a winning determination table in which a range of determination values for determining each combination or combination of combinations as winning is stored in the ROM 41b in advance, and the acquired random value for internal lottery is set in the range of determination values for each combination. It is good also as what performs an internal lottery by comparing with.

  (53) In the above embodiment, the game can be started only by setting 3 as the number of bets in the normal gaming state. On the other hand, even in the normal gaming state, the game can be started by setting 1 as the bet number, and further, the game can be started by setting 2 as the bet number. Also good. As a result, when 1 or 2 is set as the bet number in the normal gaming state, the winning probability of the small role in the internal lottery is lowered as compared with the case where 3 is set as the bet number, and the small role is won The number of paid out medals can be increased. For example, when 3 is set as the bet number in the normal gaming state, the winning probability of Bell is 1 / 4.82 and the payout number is 7, but when 1 or 2 is set as the bet number, The winning probability may be lower than 1 / 4.82 and the payout number may be more than seven. Further, the winning probability of the bell and the number of payouts may be changed when 1 is set as the bet number and when 2 is set.

  (54) In the above embodiment, the slot machine for setting bets using medals and credits is used. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It may be a slot machine for setting or a fully credit type slot machine for setting a bet amount using only credits.

  (55) Further, as shown in FIG. 52, in addition to the medal insertion mechanism such as the flow path switching solenoid 30 and the insertion medal sensor 31, a ball capture device 30 ′ for capturing a game ball, a ball capture device In addition to a medal payout mechanism such as a hopper motor 34 and a payout sensor 35, a ball payout device 34 'for paying out a game ball is provided. In addition, a payout ball detection switch 35 ′ for detecting a game ball paid out by the ball payout device 34 ′ is provided, and it is possible to set a bet number using both medals and game balls and play a game. The present invention may be applied to a slot machine in which medals and game balls are paid out when a winning is generated.

  (56) In the slot machine according to the present embodiment, the variable display device uses stepping motors (32L, 32C, and reels) that display bands (reels 2L, 2C, and 2R) each having a plurality of types of symbols that can be identified. 32R), by rotating it by driving it, it has a plurality of variable display areas (left reel, middle reel, right reel) that can display the symbols in a variable manner, and the display results can be derived and displayed in each variable display area. Each of the slot machines includes a derivation operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) operated when deriving display results of the plurality of variable display areas, and at least one of the derivation operation means. Prior determination means (internal lottery by the CPU 41a) for determining whether or not winning is allowed before the display result of the variable display area is derived; Derivation control means (reel stop control by the CPU 41a) for performing control for deriving the display result of the variable display area corresponding to the operation of the derivation operation means when the derivation operation means is operated, the derivation control means In the situation where the display result has already been derived in any one of the plurality of variable display areas and the display result has not yet been derived in the other variable display areas, the display result has not yet been derived. The variable display area that is not derived is derived with respect to the number of steps of the stepping motor at the time when the derivation operation means corresponding to the variable display area is operated (area number assigned for each step number of 1/2 symbols). From the plurality of control patterns (reel stop control by the stop control table) for uniquely specifying the displayed result (stop position), the pre-determining means Control pattern selection means for uniquely selecting a control pattern corresponding to the determination result (internal lottery result) and the display result (stop position) of the variable display area from which the display result has already been derived (any one reel has stopped) A process for creating a stop control table corresponding to a reel that is changing from the selected data creation table and selecting a data creation table corresponding to another reel. When the derivation operation means corresponding to the display area is operated, the control pattern selected by the control pattern selection means for the variable display area is uniquely identified from the number of steps when the derivation operation means is operated. Control for deriving the displayed display result as the display result of the variable display area (with reference to the stop control table, To perform control) for stopping the reel at the stop position.

  According to such a configuration, in a situation where the display result has already been derived in any one of the plurality of variable display areas, and the display result has not yet been derived in the other variable display areas. For variable display areas for which display results have not been derived, determination of predetermining means from a plurality of control patterns that uniquely identify the display results derived with respect to the number of stepping motor steps at the time when the derivation operation means is operated A control pattern corresponding to the result and the display result of the variable display area from which the display result has already been derived is uniquely selected, and control is performed to derive the display result from the corresponding variable display area. That is, there is only one control pattern applied to one display result in the variable display area from which the display result has already been derived as a result of determination by one prior determination means, and any one control pattern from a plurality of control patterns There is no need to select further.

  (57) The slot machine according to the present embodiment grants a game value of a number determined according to the type of the prize to be awarded when the prize to be awarded (small role prize) accompanied by the game value is given. The value addition processing means for performing the value addition process (the CPU 41a adds the number of medals according to the type of the small combination to the credit counter at the time of winning the small combination, and controls to pay out the medals exceeding the upper limit of the credit counter. Do).

  (58) Further, the first to sixth embodiments related to the operation of the settlement switch 10 have been described with reference to FIGS. 21 and 22. Which operation of the slot machine 1 performs the first to sixth embodiments? A selection switch may be provided to select one of the operations, and either operation may be performed according to the selection of the selection switch. In this case, the slot machine 1 includes selection control means capable of selectively executing the operations of the first to sixth embodiments. The selection control means is constituted by the main control unit 41, for example. The main control unit 41 stores a control program corresponding to each of the first to sixth embodiments. It should be noted that any one of the first to sixth embodiments is not selectable, and at least any two types may be selected, and in that case, any of them may be selected as a selection target. May be.

  (59) In the timing chart shown in FIG. 21, after the predetermined operation corresponding to the first operation of the settlement switch 10 is executed, the second operation is performed when the second operation is detected. A predetermined operation is executed in response. However, the second operation before the completion of the predetermined operation based on the first operation of the settlement switch 10 is detected and stored, and after completion of the predetermined operation based on the first operation, A predetermined operation based on the second operation may be executed based on the storage.

  With this configuration, even when the player performs the second operation without putting a hair after the first operation, it is possible to execute a predetermined operation based on both operations. As a result, the player does not need to wait for completion of a predetermined operation based on the first operation.

  (60) In the timing chart (Examples 4 to 6) shown in FIG. 22, the operation of discharging medals or converting to credits based on the set number of bets and the operation of discharging medals based on credits are performed. Done continuously. However, the latter operation may be executed after a predetermined waiting time has elapsed since the completion of the former operation. Alternatively, in addition to or in addition to that, a predetermined notification (for example, output of a notification sound or display of a notification image) may be performed when the former operation is completed.

  For example, in the sixth embodiment shown in FIG. 22 (f), a drive signal may be output to the hopper motor after a predetermined waiting time has elapsed after the BET number display is updated to zero. Good. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that the bet amount has been converted into credit and that the credit including the bet amount has been settled. Alternatively, in addition to such control, or in addition to such control, when the bet number becomes 0, control is performed to blink 1 to 3 BETLEDs 14 to 16 once, and the bet number becomes 0. May be appealed to the player.

  (61) In the third and sixth embodiments relating to the operation of the settlement switch 10, both the set number of bets are canceled in accordance with the first operation of the settlement switch 10, and the number of bets for the cancellation is set. Although it is added to the credit, if the bet number is added to the credit, a situation may occur where the upper limit value (for example, 50) of the credit number is exceeded. In such a case, it is conceivable to perform the following controls [1] to [3].

    [1] In accordance with the first operation of the settlement switch 10, the set bet number is sequentially added to the credit up to the upper limit value of the credit, and it corresponds to the bet number that cannot be fully added when reaching the upper limit value. The medals are discharged. In this case, for example, when the slot machine determines that the credit has not reached the upper limit value, and determines that the credit has not reached the upper limit value by the determination step, the slot machine subtracts the bet number and the subtraction amount. A step of adding the bet number of the bet to the credit, and a step of performing a control for subtracting and updating the bet amount and discharging a medal equivalent to the bet amount from the hopper when the determination step determines that the upper limit value is reached The process including is executed. In the case of the third embodiment, medals corresponding to the number of bets that cannot be added to the credits are discharged, and then medals corresponding to the credit of the upper limit value are discharged according to the second operation of the settlement switch 10. Perform processing. On the other hand, in the case of the sixth embodiment, after medals corresponding to the number of bets that cannot be added to the credits are discharged, a process of automatically discharging medals corresponding to the upper limit credit is performed.

    [2] In accordance with the first operation of the settlement switch 10, the set number of bets is sequentially added to the credit up to the upper limit value of the credit, and even if the credit reaches the upper limit value, Continue adding to. In the case of the third embodiment, medals corresponding to the number of credits are discharged in response to the second operation of the settlement switch 10. On the other hand, in the case of the sixth embodiment, after the addition to the exceptional credit is completed, medals corresponding to the number of credits are automatically discharged. However, in the case of the third embodiment, the betting operation for setting the bet number may not be performed in a state where the credit exceeds the upper limit value by performing the exceptional process as described above. In this case, for example, the slot machine detects a betting operation (operation of the single BET switch 5 and the MAX BET switch 6), and when the betting operation is detected by the detection step, the credit exceeds the upper limit value. On the condition that the bet number is not set using the credit according to the betting operation when the credit exceeds the upper limit and the credit does not exceed the upper limit. The process including the step of setting the number is executed. Alternatively, the method includes a step of detecting a betting operation and a step of determining whether or not the credit exceeds an upper limit value. When the determination step determines that the credit exceeds the upper limit value, the betting operation is detected. You may make it transfer to another step, without performing the step to perform.

    [3] When the first operation of the settlement switch 10 is detected, medals corresponding to the set bet number are discharged without performing any process of adding the set bet number to the credit. In the case of the third embodiment, medals corresponding to the number of credits are discharged in response to the second operation of the settlement switch 10 thereafter. On the other hand, in the case of the sixth embodiment, medals corresponding to the number of credits are automatically discharged after the medals of the set bet number are discharged. That is, when the first operation of the settlement switch 10 is detected, if the set bet number is added to the credit and the credit exceeds the upper limit value, the same processing as in the first embodiment is performed for the third embodiment. In the sixth embodiment, the same processing as in the fourth embodiment is performed. In this case, for example, when the first operation is detected, the slot machine determines whether or not the upper limit is exceeded when the bet number is added to the credit based on the set bet number and the credit number. A step (compare the value obtained by adding the value of the bet counter to the credit counter value and the credit upper limit value), and when the determination step determines that the upper limit value is exceeded, The process including the step of performing the control is executed.

  (62) In each embodiment, one medal is described as having 1 credit and 1 BET value. However, the relationship between the magnitudes of these values is not limited to this, and can be changed as appropriate. For example, one credit or one bet may be placed by inserting two medals, or a plurality of credits or multiple bets may be placed by inserting one medal. Further, at the time of settlement of the bet number and the credit number, it is assumed that the same number of medals as the bet number and the credit number are discharged, but the present invention is not limited to this.

  (63) Instead of 1 to 3 BETLEDs 14 to 16 that display the bet number depending on the lighting state, or in addition to this, a bet number display unit that displays the bet number in numbers may be provided. Alternatively, the number of bets may be displayed as an image on the liquid crystal display 51.

  (64) When the operation of the settlement switch 10 is detected in a state where the number of bets has reached a predetermined value (for example, the maximum value), each operation shown in FIGS. 21 and 22 based on the operation is performed. It may not be possible. That is, each operation shown in FIGS. 21 and 22 based on the first operation of the checkout switch 10 may be executed on condition that the number of bets has not reached a predetermined value. Even in this case, the credit may be returned as a medal based on the operation of the settlement switch 10.

  (65) With respect to the first to sixth embodiments shown in FIGS. 21 and 22, a payment cancellation operation means (settlement cancellation operation switch) capable of canceling the settlement operation of the bet amount or credit in the middle of the slot machine is provided. 1 may be provided. Alternatively, the settlement cancellation operation means may be configured by another operation switch provided in the slot machine 1. For example, in the first to third embodiments, the settlement operation is stopped by operating the settlement switch 10 again during the control based on the second operation of the settlement switch 10. Similarly, in Examples 4 to 6, the settlement operation is stopped by operating the settlement switch 10 again during the control based on the first operation of the settlement switch 10.

  (66) The main control unit 41 may directly output the hopper motor drive signal to the hopper motor 34 to control the discharge of the game medium (medals, game balls), or the discharge (payout) control for controlling the hopper motor 34. A section (CPU) is provided separately, and by sending a discharge command from the main control unit 41 to the discharge control unit, the discharge control unit outputs a hopper motor drive signal to the hopper motor 34 based on the command. Also good.

  (67) It should be considered that the embodiment disclosed this time is illustrative and not restrictive in all respects. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the description above, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

It is a front view of the slot machine of the embodiment to which the present invention is applied. It is a figure which shows the symbol arrangement | sequence of a reel. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of a slot machine. (A) is a figure showing a winning combination table. (B) is a figure which shows the classification table. It is a figure which shows the memory area of the number of judgment values acquired based on the address registered into the table according to role. It is a figure which shows the example of the value of the random number for internal lottery in each game state, the judgment value number of each combination, and the relationship with a winning combination, respectively. It is a figure which shows the structure of the table index stored in ROM41b. It is a figure which shows an example of a stop control table. It is a figure which shows the example of the flow of abnormal winning determination processing, and the storing condition of the register | resistor used at that time, ROM41b, and RAM41c. It is a timing chart which shows the period when the setting of a bet number is permitted, and the period when adjustment of credit is permitted. It is a timing chart which shows the period when the setting of a bet number is permitted, and the period when adjustment of credit is permitted. It is a timing chart which shows the relationship between the period in which the setting of the bet number is allowed, the period in which the settlement of credits is allowed, and the BB winning effect (ending effect). It is a timing chart which shows the relationship between the period in which the setting of the bet number is allowed, the period in which the settlement of credits is allowed, and the BB winning effect (ending effect). It is a timing chart which shows the relationship between the period in which the setting of the bet number is allowed, the period in which the settlement of credits is allowed, and the BB winning effect (ending effect). It is a timing chart which shows the relationship between the period in which the setting of the bet number is allowed, the period in which the settlement of credits is allowed, and the BB winning effect (ending effect). It is a timing chart which shows the relationship between the period in which the setting of a bet number is permitted, the period in which credit settlement is allowed, and the ending effect. It is a timing chart which shows the relationship between the period in which the setting of a bet number is permitted, the period in which credit settlement is allowed, and the ending effect. It is a timing chart which shows the relationship between the period in which the setting of a bet number is permitted, the period in which credit settlement is allowed, and the ending effect. It is a timing chart which shows the relationship between the period in which the setting of a bet number is permitted, the period in which credit settlement is allowed, and the ending effect. It is a timing chart which shows the relationship between the period in which the setting of a bet number is permitted, the period in which credit settlement is allowed, and the ending effect. It is a timing chart which shows the relationship between the operation of the settlement switch, the medal discharge operation, the BET number update display, and the credit number update display ((a), (b), (c) are Embodiment 1 and Embodiment, respectively. Example 2, Example 3). FIG. 6 is a timing chart showing the relationship between the operation of the settlement switch, the medal discharge operation, the BET number update display, and the credit number update display ((d), (e), and (f) are the examples 4 and 4, respectively. Example 5, Example 6). It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the starting process which CPU of a main control part performs at the time of starting. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the error process performed when CPU of a main control part generate | occur | produces an error. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the setting change process which CPU of a main control part performs in a starting process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the game process which CPU of a main control part performs after a starting process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the BET process which CPU of a main control part performs in a game control process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the BET process which CPU of a main control part performs in a game control process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the adjustment process which CPU of a main control part performs in BET processing etc. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the internal lottery process which CPU of a main control part performs in a game process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the setting value determination process which CPU of a main control part performs in an internal lottery process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the setting value determination process 1 which CPU of a main control part performs in a setting value determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the setting value determination process 2 which CPU of a main control part performs in a setting value determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the setting value determination process 3 which CPU of a main control part performs in a setting value determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the reel rotation process which CPU of a main control part performs in a game process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the process at the time of winning which CPU of a main control part performs in a game process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the winning determination process which CPU of a main control part performs in a game process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the process at the time of the game completion which CPU of a main control part performs in a game process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the process at the time of the game completion which CPU of a main control part performs in a game process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the production waiting process which CPU of the main control part performs in the process at the time of completion | finish of a game. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the timer interruption process (main) which CPU of a main control part performs regularly. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the timer interruption process (main) which CPU of a main control part performs regularly. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the stop switch process which CPU of a main control part performs in a timer interruption process (main). It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the interruption interruption process performed when CPU of a main control part inputs a voltage drop signal from an interruption detection circuit. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the starting process (sub) which CPU of a sub control part performs at the time of starting. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the timer interruption process (sub) which CPU of a sub control part performs regularly. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the control pattern setting process which CPU of a sub control part performs in a timer interruption process (sub). It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the control pattern setting process which CPU of a sub control part performs in a timer interruption process (sub). It is a figure which shows the example of the flow of the control content of the modified example of the winning determination process which CPU of a main control part performs in a game process, and the storage condition of the register | resistor used at that time, ROM41b, and RAM41c. It is a figure which shows the example of the flow of the control content of the modified example of the winning determination process which CPU of a main control part performs in a game process, and the storage condition of the register | resistor used at that time, ROM41b, and RAM41c. It is a figure which shows the example of the flow of the control content of the modified example of the winning determination process which CPU of a main control part performs in a game process, and the storage condition of the register | resistor used at that time, ROM41b, and RAM41c. It is a block diagram which shows the modification of a structure of a slot machine.

Explanation of symbols

  1 slot machine, 2L, 2C, 2R reel, 8L, 8C, 8R stop switch, 40 game control board, 41 main control unit, 41a CPU, 41 ROM, 41c RAM, 42 random number generation circuit, 43 sampling circuit, 90 effect control Substrate, 91 sub-control unit, 91a CPU, 91b ROM, 91c RAM.

Claims (14)

By setting a predetermined number of bets for one game, the game can be started, and the display result is derived and displayed on a variable display device capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols each identifiable. A slot machine in which one game is finished and a winning can be generated according to the display result of the variable display device,
A game value storage means for storing the magnitude of the game value that can be used for setting a bet;
Bet number storage means for storing bet numbers;
Bet number setting means for setting a bet number in the bet number storage means in response to a betting operation using a game value stored in the game value storage means or insertion of a game medium;
In accordance with the player's operation, a settlement operation means for instructing discharge of a number of game media corresponding to the magnitude of the game value stored in the game value storage means,
When an operation of the settlement operation unit is detected in a state where the bet number is set in the bet number storage unit, the number of games corresponding to the game value corresponding to the bet number set in the bet number storage unit The medium is discharged and the betting number storage means is controlled to be in a storage state in which the betting number is not set, and the operation of the settlement operation means is detected again before the betting number is set again in the betting number storage means. A checkout control means for discharging a number of game media corresponding to the game value stored in the game value storage means and controlling the game value storage means to be in a storage state without game value;
Special gaming state control means for shifting the gaming state to a special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state when a first special winning or a second special winning different from the first special winning occurs When,
Special gaming state value counting means for counting the magnitude of the gaming value given by the generation of the winning prize accompanied by the giving of the gaming value in the special gaming state;
In the special game state shifted with the occurrence of the first special prize, the special game is provided on the condition that the magnitude of the game value counted by the special game state value counting means has reached a first specified value. First special gaming state ending means for ending the state;
In the special gaming state that has been transferred with the occurrence of the second special prize, the value of the gaming value counted by the special gaming state value counting means reaches a second prescribed value that is greater than the first prescribed value. Second special game state ending means for ending the special game state on condition that
Betting number setting prohibiting means for prohibiting setting of the betting number by the betting number setting means when the game starts;
When a display result other than the display result corresponding to the winning prize is derived to the variable display device, the end of the game is determined when the display result is derived to the variable display device, and the grant is given to the variable display device. When a display result corresponding to a winning is derived, a game end determining means for determining the end of the game when the granting of the game value accompanying the winning winning is completed;
Bet number setting prohibition releasing means for canceling prohibition of setting of the bet number by the bet number setting prohibiting means on condition that the game end determination means determines the end of the game;
The bet number setting prohibition canceling means includes:
In the game in which the special gaming state is ended by the first special gaming state ending unit, the betting number setting prohibiting unit prohibits the setting of the betting number when the game end determining unit determines the end of the game. First betting number setting prohibition releasing means for releasing;
In the game in which the special gaming state is ended by the second special gaming state ending unit, the betting number setting prohibiting unit when a predetermined release operation is performed after the game ending determining unit determines the end of the game. And a second bet number setting prohibition canceling means for canceling the prohibition of setting of the bet number by the slot machine. By setting a predetermined number of bets for one game, the game can be started, and the display result is derived and displayed on a variable display device capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols each identifiable. A slot machine in which one game is finished and a winning can be generated according to the display result of the variable display device,
A game value storage means for storing the magnitude of the game value that can be used for setting a bet;
Bet number storage means for storing bet numbers;
Bet number setting means for setting a bet number in the bet number storage means in response to a betting operation using a game value stored in the game value storage means or insertion of a game medium;
In accordance with the player's operation, a settlement operation means for instructing discharge of a number of game media corresponding to the magnitude of the game value stored in the game value storage means,
When an operation of the settlement operation unit is detected in a state where the bet number is set in the bet number storage unit, the number of game media corresponding to the game value stored in the game value storage unit is discharged. At the same time, the game value storage means is controlled to be stored in the game value non-stored state, and the operation of the settlement operation means is detected again before the game value is stored again in the game value storage means. A checkout control means for discharging a number of game media corresponding to the game value corresponding to the bet number set in the number storage means and controlling the bet number storage means to a storage state in which the bet number is not set;
Special gaming state control means for shifting the gaming state to a special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state when a first special winning or a second special winning different from the first special winning occurs When,
Special gaming state value counting means for counting the magnitude of the gaming value given by the generation of the winning prize accompanied by the giving of the gaming value in the special gaming state;
In the special game state shifted with the occurrence of the first special prize, the special game is provided on the condition that the magnitude of the game value counted by the special game state value counting means has reached a first specified value. First special gaming state ending means for ending the state;
In the special gaming state that has been transferred with the occurrence of the second special prize, the value of the gaming value counted by the special gaming state value counting means reaches a second prescribed value that is greater than the first prescribed value. Second special game state ending means for ending the special game state on condition that
Betting number setting prohibiting means for prohibiting setting of the betting number by the betting number setting means when the game starts;
When a display result other than the display result corresponding to the winning prize is derived to the variable display device, the end of the game is determined when the display result is derived to the variable display device, and the grant is given to the variable display device. When a display result corresponding to a winning is derived, a game end determining means for determining the end of the game when the granting of the game value accompanying the winning winning is completed;
Bet number setting prohibition releasing means for canceling prohibition of setting of the bet number by the bet number setting prohibiting means on condition that the game end determination means determines the end of the game;
The bet number setting prohibition canceling means includes:
In the game in which the special gaming state is ended by the first special gaming state ending unit, the betting number setting prohibiting unit prohibits the setting of the betting number when the game end determining unit determines the end of the game. First betting number setting prohibition releasing means for releasing;
In the game in which the special gaming state is ended by the second special gaming state ending unit, the betting number setting prohibiting unit when a predetermined release operation is performed after the game ending determining unit determines the end of the game. And a second bet number setting prohibition canceling means for canceling the prohibition of setting of the bet number by the slot machine. By setting a predetermined number of bets for one game, the game can be started, and the display result is derived and displayed on a variable display device capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols each identifiable. A slot machine in which one game is finished and a winning can be generated according to the display result of the variable display device,
A game value storage means for storing the magnitude of the game value that can be used for setting a bet;
Bet number storage means for storing bet numbers;
Bet number setting means for setting a bet number in the bet number storage means in response to a betting operation using a game value stored in the game value storage means or insertion of a game medium;
In accordance with the player's operation, a settlement operation means for instructing discharge of a number of game media corresponding to the magnitude of the game value stored in the game value storage means,
When an operation of the settlement operation unit is detected in a state where the bet number is set in the bet number storage unit, a game value corresponding to the bet number set in the bet number storage unit is stored in the game value storage unit. The stored value is added to the stored value and the bet number storage unit is controlled to be in a storage state in which the bet number is not set, and the operation of the settlement operation unit is detected again before the bet number is set again in the bet number storage unit. And a checkout control means for controlling the number of game media corresponding to the game value stored in the game value storage means to be discharged and the game value storage means to be stored in a non-game value storage state.
Special gaming state control means for shifting the gaming state to a special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state when a first special winning or a second special winning different from the first special winning occurs When,
Special gaming state value counting means for counting the magnitude of the gaming value given by the generation of the winning prize accompanied by the giving of the gaming value in the special gaming state;
In the special game state shifted with the occurrence of the first special prize, the special game is provided on the condition that the magnitude of the game value counted by the special game state value counting means has reached a first specified value. First special gaming state ending means for ending the state;
In the special gaming state that has been transferred with the occurrence of the second special prize, the value of the gaming value counted by the special gaming state value counting means reaches a second prescribed value that is greater than the first prescribed value. Second special game state ending means for ending the special game state on condition that
Betting number setting prohibiting means for prohibiting setting of the betting number by the betting number setting means when the game starts;
When a display result other than the display result corresponding to the winning prize is derived to the variable display device, the end of the game is determined when the display result is derived to the variable display device, and the grant is given to the variable display device. When a display result corresponding to a winning is derived, a game end determining means for determining the end of the game when the granting of the game value accompanying the winning winning is completed;
Bet number setting prohibition releasing means for canceling prohibition of setting of the bet number by the bet number setting prohibiting means on condition that the game end determination means determines the end of the game;
The bet number setting prohibition canceling means includes:
In the game in which the special gaming state is ended by the first special gaming state ending unit, the betting number setting prohibiting unit prohibits the setting of the betting number when the game end determining unit determines the end of the game. First betting number setting prohibition releasing means for releasing;
In the game in which the special gaming state is ended by the second special gaming state ending unit, the betting number setting prohibiting unit when a predetermined release operation is performed after the game ending determining unit determines the end of the game. And a second bet number setting prohibition canceling means for canceling the prohibition of setting of the bet number by the slot machine. By setting a predetermined number of bets for one game, the game can be started, and the display result is derived and displayed on a variable display device capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols each identifiable. A slot machine in which one game is finished and a winning can be generated according to the display result of the variable display device,
A game value storage means for storing the magnitude of the game value that can be used for setting a bet;
Bet number storage means for storing bet numbers;
Bet number setting means for setting a bet number in the bet number storage means in response to a betting operation using a game value stored in the game value storage means or insertion of a game medium;
In accordance with the player's operation, a settlement operation means for instructing discharge of a number of game media corresponding to the magnitude of the game value stored in the game value storage means,
When an operation of the settlement operation unit is detected in a state where the bet number is set in the bet number storage unit, the number of games corresponding to the game value corresponding to the bet number set in the bet number storage unit After discharging the medium and controlling the betting number storage means to the storage state in which the betting number is not set, the number of gaming media corresponding to the game value stored in the gaming value storage means is discharged and the Settlement control means for controlling the game value storage means to be in a state of no game value storage;
Special gaming state control means for shifting the gaming state to a special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state when a first special winning or a second special winning different from the first special winning occurs When,
Special gaming state value counting means for counting the magnitude of the gaming value given by the generation of the winning prize accompanied by the giving of the gaming value in the special gaming state;
In the special game state shifted with the occurrence of the first special prize, the special game is provided on the condition that the magnitude of the game value counted by the special game state value counting means has reached a first specified value. First special gaming state ending means for ending the state;
In the special gaming state that has been transferred with the occurrence of the second special prize, the value of the gaming value counted by the special gaming state value counting means reaches a second prescribed value that is greater than the first prescribed value. Second special game state ending means for ending the special game state on condition that
Betting number setting prohibiting means for prohibiting setting of the betting number by the betting number setting means when the game starts;
When a display result other than the display result corresponding to the winning prize is derived to the variable display device, the end of the game is determined when the display result is derived to the variable display device, and the grant is given to the variable display device. When a display result corresponding to a winning is derived, a game end determining means for determining the end of the game when the granting of the game value accompanying the winning winning is completed;
Bet number setting prohibition releasing means for canceling prohibition of setting of the bet number by the bet number setting prohibiting means on condition that the game end determination means determines the end of the game;
The bet number setting prohibition canceling means includes:
In the game in which the special gaming state is ended by the first special gaming state ending unit, the betting number setting prohibiting unit prohibits the setting of the betting number when the game end determining unit determines the end of the game. First betting number setting prohibition releasing means for releasing;
In the game in which the special gaming state is ended by the second special gaming state ending unit, the betting number setting prohibiting unit when a predetermined release operation is performed after the game ending determining unit determines the end of the game. And a second bet number setting prohibition canceling means for canceling the prohibition of setting of the bet number by the slot machine. By setting a predetermined number of bets for one game, the game can be started, and the display result is derived and displayed on a variable display device capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols each identifiable. A slot machine in which one game is finished and a winning can be generated according to the display result of the variable display device,
A game value storage means for storing the magnitude of the game value that can be used for setting a bet;
Bet number storage means for storing bet numbers;
Bet number setting means for setting a bet number in the bet number storage means in response to a betting operation using a game value stored in the game value storage means or insertion of a game medium;
In accordance with the player's operation, a settlement operation means for instructing discharge of a number of game media corresponding to the magnitude of the game value stored in the game value storage means,
When an operation of the settlement operation unit is detected in a state where the bet number is set in the bet number storage unit, the number of game media corresponding to the game value stored in the game value storage unit is discharged. At the same time, after controlling the gaming value storage means to be in a storage state having no gaming value, the number of gaming media corresponding to the gaming value corresponding to the betting number set in the betting number storage means is discharged and the betting Settlement control means for controlling the number storage means to a storage state in which the betting number is not set;
Special gaming state control means for shifting the gaming state to a special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state when a first special winning or a second special winning different from the first special winning occurs When,
Special gaming state value counting means for counting the magnitude of the gaming value given by the generation of the winning prize accompanied by the giving of the gaming value in the special gaming state;
In the special game state shifted with the occurrence of the first special prize, the special game is provided on the condition that the magnitude of the game value counted by the special game state value counting means has reached a first specified value. First special gaming state ending means for ending the state;
In the special gaming state that has been transferred with the occurrence of the second special prize, the value of the gaming value counted by the special gaming state value counting means reaches a second prescribed value that is greater than the first prescribed value. Second special game state ending means for ending the special game state on condition that
Betting number setting prohibiting means for prohibiting setting of the betting number by the betting number setting means when the game starts;
When a display result other than the display result corresponding to the winning prize is derived to the variable display device, the end of the game is determined when the display result is derived to the variable display device, and the grant is given to the variable display device. When a display result corresponding to a winning is derived, a game end determining means for determining the end of the game when the granting of the game value accompanying the winning winning is completed;
Bet number setting prohibition releasing means for canceling prohibition of setting of the bet number by the bet number setting prohibiting means on condition that the game end determination means determines the end of the game;
The bet number setting prohibition canceling means includes:
In the game in which the special gaming state is ended by the first special gaming state ending unit, the betting number setting prohibiting unit prohibits the setting of the betting number when the game end determining unit determines the end of the game. First betting number setting prohibition releasing means for releasing;
In the game in which the special gaming state is ended by the second special gaming state ending unit, the betting number setting prohibiting unit when a predetermined release operation is performed after the game ending determining unit determines the end of the game. And a second bet number setting prohibition canceling means for canceling the prohibition of setting of the bet number by the slot machine. By setting a predetermined number of bets for one game, the game can be started, and the display result is derived and displayed on a variable display device capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols each identifiable. A slot machine in which one game is finished and a winning can be generated according to the display result of the variable display device,
A game value storage means for storing the magnitude of the game value that can be used for setting a bet;
Bet number storage means for storing bet numbers;
Bet number setting means for setting a bet number in the bet number storage means in response to a betting operation using a game value stored in the game value storage means or insertion of a game medium;
In accordance with the player's operation, a settlement operation means for instructing discharge of a number of game media corresponding to the magnitude of the game value stored in the game value storage means,
When an operation of the settlement operation unit is detected in a state where the bet number is set in the bet number storage unit, a game value corresponding to the bet number set in the bet number storage unit is stored in the game value storage unit. And the number of game media corresponding to the game value stored in the game value storage means is discharged. And a settlement control means for controlling the gaming value storage means to be in a gaming value-free memory state;
Special gaming state control means for shifting the gaming state to a special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state when a first special winning or a second special winning different from the first special winning occurs When,
Special gaming state value counting means for counting the magnitude of the gaming value given by the generation of the winning prize accompanied by the giving of the gaming value in the special gaming state;
In the special game state shifted with the occurrence of the first special prize, the special game is provided on the condition that the magnitude of the game value counted by the special game state value counting means has reached a first specified value. First special gaming state ending means for ending the state;
In the special gaming state that has been transferred with the occurrence of the second special prize, the value of the gaming value counted by the special gaming state value counting means reaches a second prescribed value that is greater than the first prescribed value. Second special game state ending means for ending the special game state on condition that
Betting number setting prohibiting means for prohibiting setting of the betting number by the betting number setting means when the game starts;
When a display result other than the display result corresponding to the winning prize is derived to the variable display device, the end of the game is determined when the display result is derived to the variable display device, and the grant is given to the variable display device. When a display result corresponding to a winning is derived, a game end determining means for determining the end of the game when the granting of the game value accompanying the winning winning is completed;
Bet number setting prohibition releasing means for canceling prohibition of setting of the bet number by the bet number setting prohibiting means on condition that the game end determination means determines the end of the game;
The bet number setting prohibition canceling means includes:
In the game in which the special gaming state is ended by the first special gaming state ending unit, the betting number setting prohibiting unit prohibits the setting of the betting number when the game end determining unit determines the end of the game. First betting number setting prohibition releasing means for releasing;
In the game in which the special gaming state is ended by the second special gaming state ending unit, the betting number setting prohibiting unit when a predetermined release operation is performed after the game ending determining unit determines the end of the game. And a second bet number setting prohibition canceling means for canceling the prohibition of setting of the bet number by the slot machine. An operation-time control prohibiting unit that prohibits the control of the settlement control unit according to the operation of the settlement operation unit when the game is started;
An operation-time control prohibition releasing means for releasing the prohibition of the control of the settlement control means by the operation-time control prohibiting means on the condition that the game end determination means determines the end of the game;
The operation-time control prohibition canceling means prohibits control of the settlement control means by the operation-time control prohibiting means when the game end determination means determines the end of the game in the game in which the special gaming state has ended. 7. The slot machine according to claim 1, further comprising an end-time control prohibition canceling unit that cancels the termination. In the game in which the special game state is ended by the second special game state end means, the special end time is determined until a predetermined time elapses after the game end determination means determines the end of the game. An end effect executing means for executing an end effect indicating that the gaming state has ended,
The second betting number setting prohibition release means is at least in advance from the game end determination means determining the end of the game in the game in which the special game state is ended by the second special game state end means. Canceling the prohibition of setting of the betting number by the betting number setting prohibiting means on condition that a predetermined time has elapsed and the predetermined releasing operation has been performed after the predetermined time has elapsed. The slot machine according to claim 1, wherein the slot machine is characterized. An operation-time control prohibiting unit that prohibits the control of the settlement control unit according to the operation of the settlement operation unit when the game is started;
An operation-time control prohibition releasing means for canceling the prohibition of the control of the settlement control means by the operation-time control prohibiting means on the condition that the game end determination means determines the end of the game;
In a game in which the second special prize has occurred, a special prize indicating that the second special prize has occurred during a period from when the game end determination means determines the end of the game until a predetermined time has elapsed. With special prize production execution means for performing production,
The betting number setting prohibition canceling means is the betting number setting prohibiting means when the predetermined time has elapsed after the game end determining means determines the end of the game in the game in which the second special winning has occurred. Including a bet number setting prohibition canceling means for canceling the setting of the bet number by the winning effect,
The operation-time control prohibition canceling means controls the adjustment control means by the operation-time control prohibiting means when the game end determination means determines the end of the game in the game in which the second special prize has occurred. 9. The slot machine according to claim 1, further comprising a winning control prohibition canceling unit that cancels the prohibition. Data storage means having a storage area for storing data for controlling the game in a readable and writable manner;
An allowable stage selecting means for selecting one of the allowable stages from a plurality of allowable stages having different ratios for determining whether or not winning is allowed based on an operation of a predetermined setting operation means; ,
A permissible stage setting means for setting data indicating a permissible stage selected by the permissible stage selection means in a permissible stage storage area assigned to the storage area of the data storage means;
Before the display result of the variable display device is derived, the data indicating the allowable level stored in the allowable level storage area is read, and the occurrence of winnings is allowed at a rate corresponding to the allowable level indicated by the read data. Pre-determining means for deciding whether to do,
A permissible step data determining means for determining whether or not the data indicating the permissible step stored in the permissible step storage area for each game is appropriate data indicating a permissible step selectable by the permissible step selecting means; ,
Disabling means for disabling the progress of the game when it is determined by the allowable stage data determination means that the data indicating the allowable stage stored in the allowable stage storage area is not appropriate data;
After the progress of the game is disabled by the disabling means, the disabling of the progress of the game is canceled on the condition that the allowable stage is newly set by the allowable stage setting means, and the progress of the game The slot machine according to any one of claims 1 to 9, further comprising a disabling release unit that enables the disabling. Data storage means having a storage area for storing data for controlling the game in a readable and writable manner;
An allowable stage selecting means for selecting one of the allowable stages from a plurality of allowable stages having different ratios for determining whether or not winning is allowed based on an operation of a predetermined setting operation means; ,
A permissible stage setting means for setting data indicating a permissible stage selected by the permissible stage selection means in a permissible stage storage area assigned to the storage area of the data storage means;
Before the display result of the variable display device is derived, the data indicating the allowable level stored in the allowable level storage area is read, and the occurrence of winnings is allowed at a rate corresponding to the allowable level indicated by the read data. Pre-determining means for deciding whether to do,
Stored data determination means for determining whether or not the data stored in the storage area is normal;
Disabling means for disabling the progress of the game when the stored data determining means determines that the data stored in the storage area is not normal,
After the progress of the game is disabled by the disabling means, the disabling of the progress of the game is canceled on the condition that the allowable stage is newly set by the allowable stage setting means, and the progress of the game The slot machine according to any one of claims 1 to 9, further comprising a disabling release unit that enables the disabling. The variable display device has a plurality of variable display areas in which the symbols can be variably displayed by rotating a display band in which a plurality of types of symbols each identifiable are arranged by driving a stepping motor. It is a display device capable of deriving and displaying the display results in the display area,
Pre-determining means for deciding whether or not to allow a winning to occur before a display result of at least one variable display area is derived;
Derivation operation means corresponding to each of the plurality of variable display areas, operated to derive and display the display results of each of the plurality of variable display areas;
Derivation control means for performing control to derive the display result of the variable display area corresponding to the derivation operation means when the derivation operation means is operated,
The derivation control means includes
In a situation where a display result has not yet been derived in any of the plurality of variable display areas, a derivation operation means corresponding to the variable display area is provided for the variable display area for which the display result has not yet been derived. A control pattern corresponding to the determination result of the predetermining unit is uniquely selected from a plurality of control patterns that uniquely specify the display result derived with respect to the number of steps of the stepping motor at the time of operation. Including control pattern selection means,
When the derivation operation means corresponding to the variable display area for which the display result has not yet been derived is operated, the control pattern selected for the variable display area by the control pattern selection means when the derivation operation means is operated The slot machine according to claim 1, wherein control is performed to derive a display result uniquely specified for the number of steps as a display result of the variable display area. Special game control means for controlling for a predetermined period in a special game that occurs in the special gaming state with a higher probability that the awarded prize is higher than the normal gaming state;
Special game determination means for determining whether or not the special game is controlled in the special game state,
The special game determination means determines whether or not the special game is controlled by the special game for each game in the special game state,
13. The special game control unit starts control of the special game when the special game determination unit determines that the special game is not controlled by the special game determination unit. A slot machine according to any one of the above. Pre-determining means for deciding whether or not to allow the occurrence of winnings before the display result of the variable display device is derived;
Abnormal winning determination that sets abnormal winning determination data that can specify whether or not the winning is permitted in the game for each bit assigned for each type of winning based on the determination result of the prior determination means Data setting means,
After the display result of the variable display device is derived, winning result data that can specify whether or not the winning has occurred for each bit assigned for each type of winning based on the derived display result is set Winning result data setting means,
Calculation means for calculating the value of bits to which the same type of winning is assigned in the abnormal winning determination data set by the abnormal winning determination data setting means and the winning result data set by the winning result data setting means When,
The system further comprises an abnormal winning determination unit that determines whether or not there is an abnormal winning based on a value of each bit calculated by the arithmetic unit. The slot machine described in.

Images